WO2022001761A1 - Communication method and apparatus - Google Patents

Communication method and apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022001761A1
WO2022001761A1 PCT/CN2021/101627 CN2021101627W WO2022001761A1 WO 2022001761 A1 WO2022001761 A1 WO 2022001761A1 CN 2021101627 W CN2021101627 W CN 2021101627W WO 2022001761 A1 WO2022001761 A1 WO 2022001761A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
terminal
access network
session
network element
network device
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/101627
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
潘奇
黄正磊
倪慧
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2022001761A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022001761A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W4/00Services specially adapted for wireless communication networks; Facilities therefor
    • H04W4/70Services for machine-to-machine communication [M2M] or machine type communication [MTC]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/02Arrangements for optimising operational condition

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a communication method and apparatus.
  • Massive machine type communications is one of the important application scenarios of the 5th-generation (5G) system, mainly for various Internet of things (IoT) services based on cellular networks application.
  • 5G 5th-generation
  • IoT Internet of things
  • the mMTC application also has low data volume (small data packet transmission of tens of bytes), low power consumption (the battery life of IoT terminals can reach 10 years), deep coverage (supports various weak coverage scenarios, such as underground garages) , elevator shaft, etc.), low complexity (reduce terminal and network costs) and other features.
  • Typical application scenarios of mMTC include video surveillance (surveillance cameras, etc.), industrial sensor networks (such as temperature sensors, pressure sensors, etc.), wearable devices (smart bracelets, smart watches, smart glasses, etc.), etc.
  • video surveillance In the video surveillance service, the camera is deployed at a fixed location and continuously transmits upstream video streams.
  • the data transmission service of each camera has the same video stream quality requirements, that is, the same quality of service (QoS).
  • QoS quality of service
  • each camera needs to establish a connection with the network, create a protocol data unit (PDU) session and determine the QoS parameters, which imposes a huge signaling burden on the core network and causes the network Inefficient use of resources.
  • PDU protocol data unit
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and apparatus, which are used to reduce signaling overhead and improve resource utilization.
  • the network elements involved in these technical solutions include mobility management network elements, session management network elements, user plane network elements, data management network elements, and policy control network elements, as follows: Taking the mobility management network element, session management network element, user plane network element, data management network element and policy control network element as AMF, SMF, UPF, UDM and PCF as examples to illustrate the technical solutions provided by this application:
  • a communication method including: an access network device receives a session context of a terminal group and an identifier of the terminal group from an AMF, and the services of the terminals in the terminal group have the same QoS requirements; The first terminal in the group receives the first message, the first message includes the identifier of the terminal group, and the access network device is the access network device accessed by the first terminal; the access network device sends the first terminal according to the first message The first response, where the session context of the terminal group is carried in the first response.
  • all terminals independently perform the PDU session establishment process or the SR process, ignoring the association between the sessions of the terminals, resulting in waste of signaling.
  • the AMF sends the session context of the terminal group to the access network device, and in the subsequent PDU session establishment process or SR process, the terminal only needs to interact with the accessed access network device to obtain the terminal group. Session context, thus avoiding repeated signaling interactions, greatly reducing tedious signaling interactions, and effectively saving network resources.
  • the access network device receiving the session context of the terminal group from the AMF includes: during the process of establishing a session by the second terminal in the terminal group, the access network device receives the session context of the terminal group from the AMF and the identifier of the terminal group, the second terminal is the first terminal in the terminal group that requests to establish a session.
  • the AMF sends the session context of the terminal group to M access network devices.
  • the terminal only needs to communicate with the access network.
  • the session context of the terminal group can be obtained by interacting with the access network devices of the terminal group, thereby avoiding repeated signaling interactions, greatly reducing tedious signaling interactions, and effectively saving network resources.
  • the access network device receives the first message from the first terminal in the terminal group, including: during the session establishment process or the service request process of the first terminal, the access network device receives the first message from the first terminal.
  • the terminal receives the first message.
  • the terminal can send the first message to the access network device in various scenarios, which increases the application scope of the method.
  • the AMF can send an IP address set to the access network device, so that the access network device can communicate with the terminals in the terminal group. Unified management of IP addresses.
  • the terminals in the terminal group access M access network devices, where M>1, M is an integer, and the access network device is one of the M access network devices, and the method further includes : The access network device sends an IP address request to the AMF, and the IP address request is used to request an IP address for the first terminal; the access network device receives the IP address allocated by the AMF for the first terminal from the AMF; the access network device sends the first terminal to the The IP address assigned by the AMF to the first terminal is sent.
  • the AMF can perform uniform IP address allocation, so as to uniformly manage the IP addresses of the terminals in the terminal group.
  • the method further includes: the access network device sends second indication information to the UPF serving the access network device, where the second indication information is used to instruct the UPF first terminal to join the first session,
  • the terminals in the terminal group share one QoS flow in the first session, or the terminals in the terminal group accessing the access network device share one QoS flow in the first session.
  • the UPF can determine the terminal that joins the first session, so that the UPF can perform IP address binding.
  • the method further includes: the access network device provides services to the UPF for the access network device to the UPF Send sixth indication information and fourth indication information, the fourth indication information is used to instruct the UPF third terminal to leave the first session, the sixth indication information is used to indicate the IP address of the third terminal, and the terminals in the terminal group share the first session One QoS flow in the first session, or the terminals accessing the access network device in the terminal group share one QoS flow in the first session.
  • the UPF can determine the terminal that leaves the first session, so that the UPF can recover the IP address.
  • the method further includes: the access network device receives third indication information from the AMF, and the third The indication information is used to instruct the third terminal to stop working; the access network device releases the connection with the third terminal.
  • the access network device can determine the terminal that stops working, thereby releasing the corresponding connection and releasing network resources.
  • the method further includes: the access network device adjusts the QoS profile of the QoS flow according to the number of terminals currently accessing the access network device in the terminal group and the session context of the terminal group .
  • the access network device can adjust the QoS execution rules according to the current number of terminals joining the first session, so as to ensure the normal transmission of the QoS flow.
  • a communication method including: during the registration process of the terminal, the AMF determines whether the session context of the terminal group to which the terminal belongs is delivered to the access network device, and the access network device is the access network device for the terminal access.
  • the AMF sends the first indication information to the terminal, and the first indication information is used to instruct the terminal to obtain the session context from the access network equipment;
  • the AMF sends the session context of the terminal group and the identifier of the terminal group to M access network devices, where the M access network devices are the access network devices accessed by the terminals in the terminal group, and the M access network devices are the access network devices accessed by the terminals in the terminal group.
  • the equipment includes the access network equipment accessed by the terminal, and M is an integer greater than 0.
  • the AMF sends the session context of the terminal group to M access network devices.
  • the AMF can send the message to other terminals.
  • the first indication information instructs the terminal to obtain the session context of the terminal group from the accessed access network device.
  • the terminal In the subsequent PDU session establishment process or SR process, the terminal only needs to interact with the accessed access network device to obtain the terminal.
  • the session context of the group is used, thereby avoiding repeated signaling interactions, greatly reducing tedious signaling interactions, and effectively saving network resources.
  • the first indication information is specifically used to instruct the terminal to obtain the session context from the access network device during the session establishment process or the service request process.
  • the terminal can obtain the session context from the access network device in various scenarios, which enlarges the application scope of the method.
  • the method further includes: the AMF receives a second message from the terminal, where the second message is used to request to establish a session for the terminal; the AMF determines that the terminal is the first in the terminal group A terminal requesting to establish a session; AMF sends a third message to SMF, the third message carries the identifier of the terminal group, and the third message is used to request the session context of the terminal group; AMF receives the session context of the terminal group from the SMF.
  • This possible implementation provides a method for acquiring the session context of the terminal group.
  • the method further includes: the AMF receives an IP address set from the SMF, where the IP address set is used for allocating IP addresses of the terminals in the terminal group.
  • the method further includes: the AMF sends an IP address set to the access network device.
  • the AMF since a terminal in a terminal group accesses an access network device, the AMF can send an IP address set to the access network device, so that the access network device can communicate with the terminals in the terminal group. Unified management of IP addresses.
  • the method further includes: the AMF receives the sixth indication information from the M access network devices;
  • the UPF served by each access network device sends fourth indication information and sixth indication information, the fourth indication information is used to instruct the UPF third terminal to leave the first session, and the sixth indication information is used to indicate the IP address of the third terminal; wherein , the terminals in the terminal group share one QoS flow in the first session, or the terminals in the terminal group accessing the same access network device share one QoS flow in the first session.
  • the UPF can be notified, so that the UPF can reclaim the IP address.
  • the method further includes: the AMF receives an IP address request from an access network device accessed by the terminal, and the IP address request is used to request an IP address for the terminal address; the AMF assigns an IP address to the terminal according to the IP address set; the AMF sends the IP address assigned to the terminal to the access network device accessed by the terminal.
  • the AMF since the terminals in the terminal group access multiple access network devices, the AMF can perform uniform IP address allocation, so as to uniformly manage the IP addresses of the terminals in the terminal group.
  • the method further includes: the AMF reclaims the IP address of the third terminal;
  • the UPF served by the network device sends fourth indication information and sixth indication information, the fourth indication information is used to instruct the UPF third terminal to leave the first session, and the sixth indication information is used to indicate the IP address of the third terminal; wherein, the terminal group The terminals in the terminal share one QoS flow in the first session, or the terminals in the terminal group that access the same access network device share one QoS flow in the first session.
  • the IP address can be recovered for subsequent allocation to other terminals, and the UPF can be notified so that the UPF can perform the same operation to ensure the information consistency of each network element in the network.
  • the method further includes: the AMF obtains, according to the context of the third terminal, the identity of the access network device accessed by the third terminal and the identity of the third terminal; The network access device sends third indication information, where the third indication information is used to instruct the third terminal to stop working.
  • the access network device can determine the terminal that stops working, thereby releasing the corresponding connection and releasing network resources.
  • the method further includes: the AMF receives the tunnel information of the M access network devices from the M access network devices; the AMF sends the M access network devices to the SMF Tunnel information for the device. Since other terminals do not need to perform the session establishment or SR process, in order to ensure that the UPF obtains the tunnel information of M access network devices, during the session establishment process of the first terminal in the terminal group, the AMF sends M Tunnel information of access network devices, SMF can let UPF obtain tunnel information of M access network devices in advance.
  • the method further includes: the AMF sends the session context of the terminal to the terminal.
  • the AMF determines the terminal group to which the terminal belongs according to the identification of the terminal, including: the AMF obtains the subscription information of the terminal from the UDM according to the identification of the terminal, and the subscription information includes information of the terminal group to which the terminal belongs.
  • This possible implementation provides a method for determining a terminal group.
  • a communication method including: a terminal receiving first indication information from an AMF during a registration process, where the first indication information is used to instruct the terminal to obtain a session context from an accessed access network device, and the terminal belongs to a terminal group , the services of the terminals in the terminal group have the same QoS requirements; the terminal sends a first message to the access network device according to the first indication information, and the first message includes the identifier of the terminal group; the terminal receives the first response from the access network device , the first response carries the session context of the terminal group.
  • the AMF in the process of establishing a session for the first terminal in the terminal group, the AMF sends the session context of the terminal group to M access network devices, and during the registration process of other terminals, the AMF can send the The first indication information instructs the terminal to obtain the session context of the terminal group from the accessed access network device.
  • the terminal In the subsequent PDU session establishment process or SR process, the terminal only needs to interact with the accessed access network device to obtain the terminal.
  • the session context of the group is used, thereby avoiding repeated signaling interactions, greatly reducing tedious signaling interactions, and effectively saving network resources.
  • the first indication information is specifically used to instruct the terminal to obtain the session context from the access network device during the session establishment process or the service request process, and the terminal sends the first indication information to the access network device according to the first indication information.
  • a message includes: according to the first indication information, the terminal sends a first message to an access network device during a session establishment process or a service request process.
  • the terminal can send the first message to the access network device in various scenarios, which increases the application scope of the method.
  • a communication method including: the SMF receives a third message of a second terminal from the AMF, the second terminal is the first terminal in the terminal group that requests to establish a session, and the services of the terminals in the terminal group have the same
  • the third message carries the identifier of the terminal group, and the third message is used to request the session context of the terminal group;
  • SMF creates the session context of the terminal group according to the identifier of the terminal group;
  • SMF sends the session context of the terminal group to the AMF.
  • a fourth aspect provides a method for enabling an AMF to acquire a session context of a terminal group.
  • the method further includes: the SMF allocates an IP address set to the terminal group, and sends the IP address set to the AMF, where the IP address set is used for allocating IP addresses of the terminals in the terminal group.
  • the method before the SMF sends the session context of the terminal group to the AMF, the method further includes: the SMF sends fifth indication information to the PCF, where the fifth indication information is used to instruct the PCF to formulate a corresponding PCC for the terminal group Rules; the SMF receives the PCC rules formulated by the PCF for the terminal group from the PCF; the SMF generates the QoS rules in the session context of the terminal group according to the PCC rules.
  • This possible implementation provides a method for acquiring PCC rules and generating QoS rules in the session context of the terminal group.
  • the method further includes: the SMF generates a PDR corresponding to the UPF serving the access network device accessed by the second terminal according to the PCC rule; and the SMF sends the IP address set and the PDR corresponding to the UPF to the UPF.
  • the UPF can obtain the QoS enforcement rule and the IP address set, so that the UPF can perform subsequent IP address binding and QoS enforcement rule adjustment.
  • a fifth aspect provides a communication method, comprising: the UPF receives an IP address set from the SMF, the IP address set is used for allocating IP addresses of terminals in a terminal group, and the services of the terminals in the terminal group have the same QoS requirements, The terminals in the terminal group share one QoS flow in the first session, or the terminals in the terminal group that access the same access network device share one QoS flow in the first session; the UPF receives the second indication information, and the second The indication information is used to instruct the UPF first terminal to join the first session, and the UPF binds the first terminal to the IP address in the IP address set; or, the UPF receives the sixth indication information and the fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate The UPF third terminal leaves the first session, the sixth indication information is used to indicate the IP address of the third terminal, and the UPF recycles the IP address of the third terminal according to the fourth indication information and the sixth indication information.
  • the UPF can perform IP address binding
  • the method further includes: the UPF receives a PDR corresponding to the UPF from the SMF, and the PDR is generated according to the PCC rule formulated for the terminal group; and the UPF adjusts the PDR according to the second indication information or the fourth indication information.
  • the UPF can obtain the QoS execution rules, and adjust the QoS execution rules according to the current number of terminals joining the first session, so as to ensure the normal transmission of the QoS flow.
  • a communication device comprising: a communication unit and a processing unit; a processing unit for receiving, through the communication unit, a session context of a terminal group and an identifier of the terminal group from an AMF, and services of the terminals in the terminal group have the same QoS requirements; the processing unit is further configured to receive a first message from a first terminal in the terminal group through the communication unit, where the first message includes an identifier of the terminal group, and the communication device is a communication device accessed by the first terminal; The processing unit is further configured to send a first response to the first terminal through the communication unit according to the first message, where the first response carries the session context of the terminal group.
  • the processing unit is specifically configured to: in the process of establishing a session by the second terminal in the terminal group, receive the session context of the terminal group from the AMF through the communication unit, and the second terminal is the terminal group in the terminal group.
  • the first terminal to request a session.
  • the processing unit is specifically configured to: receive the first message from the first terminal through the communication unit during the session establishment process or the service request process of the first terminal.
  • the terminals in the terminal group access M communication apparatuses, where M>1, M is an integer, and the communication apparatus is one of the M communication apparatuses.
  • the AMF sends an IP address request, and the IP address request is used to request an IP address for the first terminal;
  • the processing unit is further configured to receive the IP address allocated by the AMF for the first terminal from the AMF through the communication unit; the processing unit is also used to pass the communication unit
  • the IP address assigned by the AMF to the first terminal is sent to the first terminal.
  • the processing unit is further configured to send second indication information to the UPF that provides services for the communication device through the communication unit, where the second indication information is used to instruct the UPF first terminal to join the first session, the terminal group The terminals in the terminal share one QoS flow in the first session, or the terminals in the terminal group accessing the communication apparatus share one QoS flow in the first session.
  • the processing unit is further configured to send a sixth indication to the UPF serving the communication device through the communication unit information and fourth indication information, the fourth indication information is used to instruct the UPF third terminal to leave the first session, the sixth indication information is used to indicate the IP address of the third terminal, and the terminals in the terminal group share one QoS in the first session flow, or the terminals in the terminal group accessing the communication apparatus share one QoS flow in the first session.
  • the processing unit when the third terminal in the terminal group that accesses the communication apparatus stops working, the processing unit is further configured to receive third indication information from the AMF through the communication unit, the third indication information It is used to instruct the third terminal to stop working; the processing unit is also used to release the connection with the third terminal.
  • the processing unit is further configured to adjust the QoS profile of the QoS flow according to the number of terminals currently accessing the communication apparatus in the terminal group and the session context of the terminal group.
  • a communication device comprising: a communication unit and a processing unit; during the registration process of the terminal, the processing unit is used to determine whether the session context of the terminal group to which the terminal belongs is delivered to the access network device, and then receives the The network access device is the access network device accessed by the terminal, and the services of the terminals in the terminal group have the same QoS requirements; if so, the communication unit is used to send the first indication information to the terminal, and the first indication information is used to instruct the terminal to send to the terminal.
  • the access network device obtains the session context; if not, in the process of establishing the session by the terminal, the communication unit is configured to send the session context of the terminal group and the identifier of the terminal group to the M access network devices, and the M access network devices.
  • the device is an access network device accessed by a terminal in the terminal group, the M access network devices include the access network device accessed by the terminal, and M is an integer greater than 0.
  • the first indication information is specifically used to instruct the terminal to obtain the session context from the access network device during the session establishment process or the service request process.
  • the communication unit is further configured to receive a second message from the terminal, where the second message is used to request to establish a session for the terminal; the processing unit is further configured to determine whether the terminal is the first terminal in the terminal group that requests to establish a session; the communication unit is further configured to send a third message to the SMF, where the third message carries the identifier of the terminal group, and the third message is used to request the session context of the terminal group; the communication unit, Also used to receive the session context of the endpoint group from the SMF.
  • the communication unit is further configured to receive an IP address set from the SMF, where the IP address set is used for allocating IP addresses of the terminals in the terminal group.
  • the communication unit is further configured to send the IP address set to the access network device.
  • the communication unit when the third terminal in the terminal group stops working, the communication unit is further configured to receive the sixth indication information from the M access network devices; the communication unit is further configured to receive the sixth indication information from the M access network devices; Send fourth indication information and sixth indication information to the UPF serving M access network devices through SMF, the fourth indication information is used to instruct the UPF third terminal to leave the first session, and the sixth indication information is used to instruct the third terminal where the terminals in the terminal group share one QoS flow in the first session, or the terminals in the terminal group accessing the same access network device share one QoS flow in the first session.
  • the communication unit in the process of establishing a session for the terminal, is further configured to receive an IP address request from an access network device accessed by the terminal, and the IP address request is used to request an IP address for the terminal address; the processing unit is further configured to assign an IP address to the terminal according to the IP address set; the communication unit is further configured to send the IP address assigned to the terminal to the access network device accessed by the terminal.
  • the processing unit when the third terminal in the terminal group stops working, the processing unit is further configured to reclaim the IP address of the third terminal; the communication unit is further configured to send messages to the third terminal through SMF
  • the UPF served by the accessed access network device sends fourth indication information and sixth indication information, the fourth indication information is used to instruct the UPF third terminal to leave the first session, and the sixth indication information is used to indicate the IP address of the third terminal wherein, the terminals in the terminal group share one QoS flow in the first session, or the terminals in the terminal group accessing the same access network device share one QoS flow in the first session.
  • the processing unit is further configured to acquire the identity of the access network device accessed by the third terminal and the identity of the third terminal according to the context of the third terminal; the communication unit is further configured to send the third terminal to the third terminal.
  • the access network device accessed by the terminal sends third indication information, where the third indication information is used to instruct the third terminal to stop working.
  • the communication unit in the process of establishing a session by the terminal, is further configured to receive tunnel information of the M access network devices from the M access network devices; the communication unit is further configured to send the SMF to the SMF Tunnel information of M access network devices.
  • the communication unit is further configured to send the session context of the terminal to the terminal.
  • the processing unit is specifically configured to: obtain subscription information of the terminal from the UDM through the communication unit according to the identifier of the terminal, where the subscription information includes information of the terminal group to which the terminal belongs.
  • a communication device comprising: a communication unit and a processing unit; the processing unit is configured to receive first indication information from the AMF during a registration process through the communication unit, where the first indication information is used to instruct the communication device to send
  • the incoming access network device obtains the session context, the communication device belongs to the terminal group, and the services of the communication devices in the terminal group have the same QoS requirements; the processing unit is further configured to send the communication unit to the access network device according to the first indication information
  • the first message includes the identifier of the terminal group; the processing unit is further configured to receive a first response from the access network device through the communication unit, where the first response carries the session context of the terminal group.
  • the first indication information is specifically used to instruct the communication apparatus to obtain the session context from the access network device during the session establishment process or the service request process
  • the processing unit is specifically configured to: according to the first indication information , in the session establishment process or the service request process, the first message is sent to the access network device through the communication unit.
  • a communication device comprising: a communication unit and a processing unit; the communication unit is configured to receive a third message of a second terminal from the AMF, where the second terminal is the first terminal in the terminal group that requests to establish a session , the services of the terminals in the terminal group have the same QoS requirements, the third message carries the identifier of the terminal group, and the third message is used to request the session context of the terminal group; the processing unit is used to create a terminal group according to the identifier of the terminal group. Session context; the communication unit is also used to send the session context of the terminal group to the AMF.
  • the processing unit is further configured to allocate an IP address set to the terminal group, and send the IP address set to the AMF through the communication unit, where the IP address set is used for allocating IP addresses of the terminals in the terminal group.
  • the communication unit is further configured to send fifth indication information to the PCF, where the fifth indication information is used to instruct the PCF to formulate corresponding PCC rules for the terminal group; the communication unit is further configured to receive the PCF from the PCF The PCC rule formulated for the terminal group; the processing unit is further configured to generate the QoS rule in the session context of the terminal group according to the PCC rule.
  • the processing unit is further configured to generate a PDR corresponding to the UPF serving the access network device accessed by the second terminal according to the PCC rule; the communication unit is further configured to send the IP address set and the UPF to the UPF. PDR corresponding to UPF.
  • a communication device comprising: a communication unit and a processing unit; the processing unit is configured to receive an IP address set from the SMF through the communication unit, where the IP address set is used for allocating IP addresses of terminals in a terminal group,
  • the services of the terminals in the terminal group have the same QoS requirements, and the terminals in the terminal group share one QoS flow in the first session, or the terminals in the terminal group that access the same access network device share the same QoS flow in the first session.
  • a QoS flow; the processing unit is further configured to receive second indication information through the communication unit, the second indication information is used to instruct the first terminal of the communication device to join the first session, and the processing unit is further configured to aggregate the first terminal and the IP address or, the processing unit is further configured to receive sixth indication information and fourth indication information through the communication unit, the fourth indication information is used to instruct the third terminal of the communication device to leave the first session, and the sixth indication information is used for for indicating the IP address of the third terminal, the processing unit is further configured to recover the IP address of the third terminal according to the fourth indication information and the sixth indication information.
  • the processing unit is further configured to receive a PDR corresponding to the communication device from the SMF through the communication unit, and the PDR is generated according to the PCC rule formulated for the terminal group; the processing unit is further configured to receive the PDR according to the second indication information or The fourth indication information adjusts the PDR.
  • a communication apparatus comprising: a processor.
  • the processor is connected to the memory, the memory is used for storing computer-executed instructions, and the processor executes the computer-executed instructions stored in the memory, thereby implementing any one of the methods provided in any one of the first to fifth aspects.
  • the memory and the processor may be integrated together, or may be independent devices. In the latter case, the memory may be located in the communication device or outside the communication device.
  • the processor includes a logic circuit, and also includes at least one of an input interface and an output interface.
  • the output interface is used for performing the sending action in the corresponding method
  • the input interface is used for performing the receiving action in the corresponding method.
  • the communication device further includes a communication interface and a communication bus, and the processor, the memory and the communication interface are connected through the communication bus.
  • the communication interface is used to perform the actions of transceiving in the corresponding method.
  • the communication interface may also be referred to as a transceiver.
  • the communication interface includes at least one of a transmitter and a receiver. In this case, the transmitter is configured to perform the sending action in the corresponding method, and the receiver is configured to perform the receiving action in the corresponding method.
  • the communication device exists in the form of a chip product.
  • a twelfth aspect provides a communication device, comprising a processor and an interface circuit, the interface circuit is configured to receive signals from other communication devices other than the communication device and transmit to the processor or send signals from the processor to the communication device
  • the processor is used to implement any one of the methods provided in any one of the first to fifth aspects by using a logic circuit or executing code instructions.
  • a thirteenth aspect provides a communication system, including the communication apparatus provided by any one or more of the sixth aspect, the seventh aspect, the eighth aspect, the ninth aspect, and the tenth aspect.
  • a fourteenth aspect provides a computer-readable storage medium, comprising computer-executable instructions, which, when the computer-executable instructions are run on a computer, cause the computer to execute any one of the first to fifth aspects provided method.
  • a fifteenth aspect provides a computer program product, comprising computer-executable instructions, which, when the computer-executable instructions are run on a computer, cause the computer to perform any one of the methods provided in any one of the first to fifth aspects.
  • Figure 1 is an architecture diagram of a 5G network
  • FIG. 3 is a flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart of still another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of the composition of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of another communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • words such as “first” and “second” are used to distinguish the same or similar items with basically the same function and effect.
  • words “first”, “second” and the like do not limit the quantity and execution order, and the words “first”, “second” and the like are not necessarily different.
  • the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application may be applied to a fourth generation (4th Generation, 4G) system, various systems based on 4G system evolution, 5G systems, and various systems based on 5G system evolution.
  • the 4G system may also be called an evolved packet system (EPS).
  • EPS evolved packet system
  • the core network of the 4G system may be called an evolved packet core (EPC), and the access network may be called long term evolution (LTE).
  • LTE long term evolution
  • the core network of the 5G system can be called 5GC (5G core), and the access network can be called new radio (NR).
  • FIG. 1 exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a network architecture of a 5G system.
  • the 5G system may include: an authentication server function (AUSF) network element, an access and mobility management function (core access and mobility management function, AMF) network element, a data network (DN, DN) ), unified data management (UDM) network element, policy control function (PCF) network element, (radio) access network ((R)AN) network element, user User plane function (UPF) network element, terminal (terminal), application function (AF) network element, session management function (session management function, SMF) network element, network exposure function (network exposure function, NEF) ) network element, network function repository function (NRF) network element, unified database (unified data repository, UDR) network element.
  • AUSF authentication server function
  • AMF access and mobility management function
  • AMF access and mobility management function
  • DN data network
  • UDM unified data management
  • PCF policy control function
  • R user User plane function
  • AF application function
  • the (R)AN network element, AMF network element, SMF network element, AUSF network element, UDM network element, UPF network element and PCF network element in Figure 1 are only a name, and the name is related to the network element itself. does not constitute a limitation.
  • the entities or devices corresponding to these network elements may also have other names, which are not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the UDM network element may also be replaced with a user home server (home subscriber server, HSS) or user subscription database (user subscription database, USD) or database network element, etc., which are described here uniformly, and will not be repeated below. .
  • (R)AN network element AMF network element, SMF network element, UDM network element, UPF network element, PCF network element, etc. are referred to by RAN, AMF, SMF, UDM, UPF, PCF, etc. respectively. .
  • the terminal, RAN, UPF, and DN in Figure 1 are generally referred to as user plane network elements.
  • User data traffic can be transmitted through the PDU session established between the terminal and the DN, and the transmission will pass through the two network elements, RAN and UPF.
  • the user plane is used for service data bearing.
  • the other network elements in Figure 1 are called control plane network elements, and are mainly responsible for functions such as authentication and authentication, registration management, session management, mobility management, and policy control, so as to achieve reliable and stable transmission of user layer traffic.
  • the control plane is used to carry signaling messages.
  • Figure 1 shows the interaction relationship between network elements and corresponding interfaces.
  • the terminal and the AMF can interact through the N1 interface, and the interaction message is called an N1 message (Message).
  • N1 message Message
  • Some interfaces are implemented in the form of service interfaces.
  • PCF has functions such as providing policy rules to network elements on the control plane.
  • UDM has functions such as managing user contract data and generating user authentication information.
  • AF which may be an application server, may belong to an operator or a third party. It mainly supports interaction with the 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) core network to provide services, such as influencing data routing decisions, policy control functions, or providing some third-party services to the network side.
  • 3GPP 3rd generation partnership project
  • RAN a network composed of multiple access network devices (also known as RAN nodes or network devices), implements wireless physical layer functions, resource scheduling and wireless resource management, wireless access control and mobility management functions, and quality of service management. , data compression and encryption functions.
  • the access network equipment is connected to the UPF through the user plane interface N3, and is used to transmit data of the terminal.
  • the access network equipment establishes a control plane signaling connection with the AMF through the control plane interface N2 to implement functions such as radio access bearer control.
  • AMF is mainly responsible for the signaling processing part, such as terminal registration management, terminal connection management, terminal reachability management, terminal access authorization and access authentication, terminal security function, terminal mobility management, Network slice selection, SMF selection, terminal attachment and detachment functions.
  • the AMF acts as the anchor point for the N1 and N2 signaling connections and provides the N1/N2 interface session management (session management, SM) message routing for the SMF; maintains and manages the state information of the terminal.
  • SM session management
  • the AMF network element provides services for a session in the terminal, it provides storage resources of the control plane for the session to store the session ID, the ID of the SMF associated with the session ID, and the like.
  • SMF is mainly responsible for all control plane functions of terminal session management, including UPF selection, control and redirection, Internet Protocol (IP) address allocation and management, session QoS management, and obtaining policy and charging control from PCF ( policy and charging control, PCC) policy, bearer establishment, modification and release, etc.
  • IP Internet Protocol
  • PCC policy and charging control
  • the SMF also acts as a termination point for the SM part of a non-access stratum (NAS) message.
  • NAS non-access stratum
  • UPF as the anchor point of the PDU session connection, is responsible for the terminal data packet filtering, data transmission/forwarding (for example, forwarding the data exchanged between the access network device and the DN), rate control, generation of charging information, User plane QoS processing, uplink transmission authentication, transmission level verification, downlink data packet buffering and downlink data notification triggering, etc.
  • the UPF can also act as a branch point for a multi-homed PDU session.
  • the transmission resources and scheduling functions that serve the terminal in the UPF are managed and controlled by the SMF.
  • the terminal may be a wireless terminal or a wired terminal.
  • a wireless terminal may be a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to a user, a handheld device with wireless connectivity, or other processing device connected to a wireless modem.
  • a certain air interface technology (such as NR technology or LTE technology) is used between the terminal and the access network device to communicate with each other.
  • a certain air interface technology (such as NR technology or LTE technology) can also be used between terminals to communicate with each other.
  • a wireless terminal may communicate with one or more core network devices via access network devices, such as with AMF, SMF, and the like.
  • the wireless terminal may be a mobile terminal, such as a mobile phone (or "cellular" phone), smart phone, satellite wireless device, wireless modem card, and computer with a mobile terminal, for example, may be laptop, portable, pocket, Handheld, computer built-in or vehicle mounted mobile devices that exchange voice and/or data with access network equipment.
  • the wireless terminal may be a personal communication service (PCS) phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital Assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA), virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) glasses, augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) glasses, machine type communication terminals and other equipment.
  • PCS personal communication service
  • SIP session initiation protocol
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • PDA personal digital Assistant
  • VR virtual reality
  • AR augmented reality
  • the communication equipment loaded on the vehicle is a kind of terminal, and the roadside unit (RSU) can also be used as a kind of terminal.
  • the communication equipment loaded on the UAV can also be regarded as a kind of terminal.
  • a wireless terminal may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), subscriber unit (subscriber unit), subscriber station (subscriber station), mobile station (mobile station), mobile station (mobile), remote station (remote station), receiver Access point, access terminal, user terminal, user agent, etc.
  • the network architecture of the 5G network may also include other functional network elements.
  • a network exposure function (NEF) network element may also be included between the AF network element and the PCF network element, which may be used to exchange internal and external information of the network.
  • NEF network exposure function
  • a network element may also be referred to as an entity or a device or the like.
  • the session in this embodiment of the present application may be a PDU session, which is a connection between a terminal and a DN, and is used to provide a PDU connection service.
  • the PDU session type may be an IP connection, an Ethernet connection, or an unstructured data connection.
  • a terminal can initiate the establishment of one or more PDU sessions to connect to the same DN or to different DNs.
  • a QoS flow is the most refined QoS differentiation granularity in a PDU session, and a QoS flow identity (QFI) is used to identify a QoS flow.
  • QFI QoS flow identity
  • a PDU session can include multiple QoS flows, and each QoS flow can carry multiple services.
  • the QoS execution rule can be called QoS profile (QoS profile), on the terminal, the QoS execution rule can be called QoS rule (QoS rule), on UPF, the QoS rule
  • the execution rules can be called packet detection rules (packet detection rules, PDR).
  • This application can be applied to the Internet of Things, specifically in scenarios where there are a large number of terminals, the QoS requirements of the terminals are the same or similar, and the location of the terminals is relatively fixed, for example, video surveillance scenarios, sensor network scenarios, wearable devices (smart wristbands, smart watches, smart glasses, etc.)
  • each installed camera independently executes the PDU session establishment process specified by the existing 3GPP protocol (for the specific process, please refer to the third-generation partners.
  • Plan (3rd generation partnership project, 3GPP) technical specification technical specification, TS) 23.502 clause (Clause) 4.3.2
  • 3GPP 3rd generation partnership project
  • each camera needs to perform a service request (SR) process one by one. Enter the connection state, and activate the existing PDU session at the same time to realize the corresponding uplink data transmission (for the specific process, please refer to 3GPP TS 23.502 Clause 4.2.3), which causes a huge signaling burden on the core network, resulting in inefficient use of network resources .
  • SR service request
  • sensors with fixed locations and the same QoS requirements need to enter the idle state to save energy.
  • each sensor needs to execute the SR process to enter the connected state. , and activate the existing PDU session at the same time to realize the corresponding uplink data transmission. Therefore, the same problem also exists.
  • the present application proposes a communication method.
  • the network side can make use of these correlations between terminals to create a "whole/group" PDU session for such terminals, that is, in a group unit.
  • To establish a PDU session or activate a PDU session it is not necessary for each terminal to perform a PDU session establishment process or an SR process, simplifying the PDU session establishment process or SR process to ensure that the terminal can quickly complete the PDU session establishment or PDU session activation, effectively avoiding complex information. Enable interaction, improve network resource utilization, speed up network connection establishment and state transition, and avoid waste of signaling resources.
  • the methods provided in the embodiments of the present application are described in detail below.
  • the network elements involved in this application include mobility management network elements, session management network elements, user plane network elements, data management network elements, and policy control network elements.
  • the data management network element and the policy control network element are respectively AMF, SMF, UPF, UDM and PCF in the 5G network as an example to illustrate the method provided in this application.
  • AMF, SMF, UPF, UDM and PCF in the following may be replaced by mobility management network elements, session management network elements, user plane network elements, data management network elements and policy control network elements, respectively.
  • this application is applied to a 4G system or other communication systems (for example, a communication system that will evolve in the future), it is sufficient to replace the network elements involved in this application with network elements with the same or similar functions in the corresponding communication system for understanding. .
  • the method includes:
  • the AMF determines whether the session context of the terminal group to which terminal A belongs is delivered to the access network device (denoted as access network device A), and the access network device A is: Access network equipment accessed by terminal A.
  • the services of the terminals in the terminal group have the same or similar QoS requirements.
  • the terminal group may be a group of cameras with the same QoS requirement or a group of sensors with the same QoS requirement.
  • QoS requirements can be characterized by multiple QoS parameters, such as delay, packet loss rate, etc. Similar QoS requirements may refer to two QoS requirements with the same partial QoS parameters, for example, two QoS requirements with the same delay and/or packet loss rate. Similar QoS requirements can also refer to two QoS requirements whose difference between the same QoS parameters does not exceed a threshold. Applications are not limited. For example, two QoS requirements that differ by no more than 2 milliseconds (ms) between delays can be considered similar QoS requirements, or, where the difference between Two QoS requirements exceeding 0.1% can be considered as similar QoS requirements.
  • ms milliseconds
  • Terminal A may be any terminal in the terminal group.
  • terminal A can send a registration request (registration request) to the AMF, and the registration request can include the identity of terminal A, and AMF determines the terminal group to which terminal A belongs according to the identity of terminal A, and then judges the session of the terminal group. Whether the context is delivered to access network device A.
  • the AMF determines the terminal group to which the terminal A belongs according to the identifier of the terminal A, including: the AMF obtains the subscription information of the terminal A from the UDM according to the identifier of the terminal A, and the subscription information includes information of the terminal group to which the terminal A belongs.
  • the information of the terminal group in the UDM can be obtained from the AF, and the AF can send the information of the terminal group to the UDM through the capability opening information.
  • the information of the terminal group in the UDM may also be configured by the operator, which is not limited in this application.
  • the information of the terminal group may indicate which terminals belong to a terminal group and the identifier of the terminal group. Further, the information of the terminal group may also include location information of each terminal, so as to determine which access network equipment these terminals are covered by.
  • step 201 If the judgment result in step 201 is yes, it means that the terminal A is not the first terminal in the terminal group to request the establishment of the session. In this case, step 202 is executed. If the judgment result in step 201 is no, it means that terminal A is the first terminal in the terminal group that requests to establish a session, and in this case, step 203 is executed.
  • the AMF sends first indication information to terminal A, where the first indication information is used to instruct terminal A to obtain a session context from access network device A (or the first indication information is used to instruct terminal A to access the access network device A). get the session context).
  • the terminal A receives the first indication information from the AMF during the registration process.
  • the first indication information may be carried in a registration response (or a registration accept (registration accept) message).
  • the AMF sends one or more of the session context of the terminal group and the identifier of the terminal group to the M access network devices.
  • each of the M access network devices receives one or more of the session context of the terminal group and the identifier of the terminal group from the AMF.
  • the M access network devices are access network devices accessed by terminals in the terminal group, the M access network devices include access network device A accessed by terminal A, and M is an integer greater than 0.
  • the AMF may determine the location information of each terminal according to the information of the terminal group, and determine the M access network devices corresponding to the terminal group according to the location information of each terminal.
  • the identifier of the terminal group is used to identify a terminal group.
  • the session context of the terminal group may include QoS rules, PDU session identifiers, slice related information (for example, data network name (DNN) or network slice selection identifier (single-network slice selection assistance information, S-NSSAI)), etc. .
  • QoS rules include QFI, rate, delay, etc.
  • Some or all of the terminals in the terminal group may share one QoS flow in one session (referred to as the first session).
  • the session context of the terminal group refers to the common part of the session contexts of all the terminals in the terminal group, and in this case, all the terminals in the terminal group correspond to the same QFI.
  • each terminal in the terminal group maps data to a data radio bearer (DRB) corresponding to the first QFI (that is, the QFI of the first QoS flow), and the access network equipment accessed by the terminal After receiving, the data of the DRB corresponding to the first QoS flow is mapped to the first QoS flow corresponding to the first QFI.
  • DRB data radio bearer
  • the QFI in the session context of the terminal group is the QFI of the first QoS flow.
  • the terminals in the terminal group accessing the same access network device share one QoS flow in the first session.
  • the session context of the terminal group corresponds to the access network device, and the session contexts corresponding to different access network devices may be the same or different.
  • the session context of the terminal group corresponding to one access network device refers to the common part of the session context of the terminals accessing the same access network device.
  • terminals accessing the same access network device correspond to the same QFI
  • terminals accessing different access network devices correspond to the same QFI or different QFIs.
  • each terminal accessing the same access network device maps data to the DRB corresponding to the QFI of the QoS flow corresponding to the access network device.
  • the data corresponding to the QoS flow corresponding to the access network device is mapped to the QoS flow corresponding to the QFI of the QoS flow corresponding to the access network device.
  • the terminals that access access network device 1 The QoS flow 1 in the first session is shared, the terminals accessing the access network device 2 share the QoS flow 2 in the first session, and the terminals accessing the access network device 3 share the QoS flow 3 in the first session.
  • the QFI in the session context of the terminal group corresponding to the access network device 1 is the QFI of the QoS flow 1
  • the QFI in the session context of the terminal group corresponding to the access network device 2 is the QFI of the QoS flow 2.
  • the QFI in the session context of the terminal group corresponding to the network access device 3 is the QFI of the QoS flow 3 .
  • Access network equipment QFI in the session context of a terminal group Access network equipment 1 QFI for QoS Flow 1 Access network equipment 2 QFI for QoS Flow 2 Access network equipment 3 QFI for QoS Flow 3
  • the AMF in the process of establishing a session for the first terminal in the terminal group, the AMF sends the session context of the terminal group to M access network devices. Send the first indication information to instruct the terminal to obtain the session context of the terminal group from the accessed access network device.
  • the terminal In the subsequent PDU session establishment process or SR process, the terminal only needs to interact with the accessed access network device to obtain the session context. The session context of the terminal group, thereby avoiding repeated signaling interactions, greatly reducing tedious signaling interactions, and effectively saving network resources.
  • case 1 terminal A is the first terminal in the terminal group to request to establish a session
  • case 2 terminal A is not the first terminal in the terminal group to request to establish a session
  • Terminal A is the first terminal in the terminal group that requests to establish a session.
  • terminal A is denoted as the second terminal.
  • the access network device receives one or more of the session context of the terminal group and the identity of the terminal group from the AMF, including:
  • the access network device accessed by the second terminal receives one or more of the session context of the terminal group and the identifier of the terminal group from the AMF. That is to say, in the process of establishing a session for the first terminal in the terminal group, the access network device to which the terminal accesses receives one or more of the session context of the terminal group and the identifier of the terminal group from the AMF, so as to facilitate subsequent processes , other terminals accessing the access network device acquire the session context of the terminal group from the access network device.
  • the AMF can obtain the session context of the terminal group from the SMF, including:
  • the AMF receives a second message from the second terminal, where the second message is used to request the establishment of a PDU session for the second terminal.
  • the AMF determines that the second terminal is the first terminal in the terminal group that requests to establish a PDU session. Specifically, the AMF may determine whether other terminals in the terminal group have requested to establish a PDU session, and if not, determine that the second terminal is the first terminal in the terminal group that requests to establish a PDU session.
  • the AMF sends a third message to the SMF, where the third message carries the identifier of the terminal group, and the third message is used to request the session context of the terminal group.
  • the SMF receives the third message of the second terminal from the AMF.
  • the SMF creates a session context of the terminal group according to the identifier of the terminal group.
  • the SMF sends the session context of the terminal group to the AMF. Accordingly, the AMF receives the session context of the terminal group from the SMF.
  • the method further includes:
  • the SMF sends fifth indication information to the PCF, where the fifth indication information is used to instruct the PCF to formulate a corresponding PCC rule for the terminal group.
  • the fifth indication information may include the identifier of the terminal group.
  • the PCF receives the fifth indication information from the SMF.
  • the PCF formulates a PCC rule for the terminal group according to the identifier of the terminal group, and sends the PCC rule to the SMF.
  • the SMF receives the PCC rules formulated by the PCF for the terminal group from the PCF.
  • the SMF generates the QoS rule in the session context of the terminal group according to the PCC rule.
  • the method further includes:
  • the AMF sends the session context of the second terminal to the second terminal.
  • the second terminal receives the session context of the second terminal from the AMF.
  • the session context of the second terminal and the session context of the terminal group may be the same, or the session context of the second terminal contains more information than the session context of the terminal group.
  • the second terminal may send the session context of the second terminal to the second terminal through the access network device accessed by the second terminal.
  • the method further includes:
  • the M access network devices send the tunnel information of the access network devices to the AMF.
  • the AMF receives the tunnel information of the access network devices from the M access network devices, and sends the tunnel information of the M access network devices to the SMF.
  • the SMF receives the tunnel information of the M access network devices from the AMF, and sends the tunnel information of the access network device to the UPF serving each access network device, so that the UPF sends data packets to the access network device.
  • the method further includes:
  • the SMF allocates an IP address set to the terminal group, and sends the IP address set to the AMF, and the IP address set is used for allocating IP addresses of the terminals in the terminal group. Accordingly, the AMF receives the set of IP addresses from the SMF.
  • the method further includes:
  • the SMF generates a PDR corresponding to the UPF serving the access network device accessed by the second terminal according to the PCC rule.
  • the SMF sends the IP address set and the corresponding PDR to the UPF. Accordingly, the UPF receives the IP address set and the corresponding PDR from the SMF.
  • the PDR may include the IP address of the second terminal, and the UPF may determine that the second terminal joins the first session according to the PDR.
  • the first terminal can obtain the session context and the IP address assigned to itself through the PDU session establishment accept message.
  • Terminal A is not the first terminal in the terminal group that requests to establish a session.
  • terminal A is denoted as the first terminal.
  • the method also includes:
  • the first terminal sends a first message to the access network device according to the first indication information, where the first message includes the identifier of the terminal group.
  • the access network device receives the first message from the first terminal in the terminal group.
  • the access network device sends a first response to the first terminal according to the first message, where the first response carries the session context of the terminal group.
  • the first terminal receives the first response from the access network device, and determines the session context of the terminal group according to the first response.
  • the first indication information is specifically used to instruct the terminal to obtain the session context of the terminal group from the access network device during the session establishment process or the SR process.
  • sending the first message to the access network device by the first terminal according to the first indication information includes: according to the first indication information, the terminal sends the first message to the access network device during the session establishment process or the SR process.
  • the access network device receiving the first message from the first terminal in the terminal group includes: during the session establishment process or the SR process of the first terminal, the access network device receives the first message from the first terminal in the terminal group. a message.
  • both the first message and the first response may be radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) messages.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the first message may be an RRC Connection Reconfiguration (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) message
  • the first response may be an RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) message
  • the first message may be an RRC establishment after an RRC connection is established Complete (RRC Setup Complete) message
  • the first response may be an RRC Connection Reconfiguration (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) message.
  • the first response may be a NAS message.
  • the method further includes:
  • the access network device accessed by the first terminal sends second indication information to the UPF serving the access network device, where the second indication information is used to instruct the UPF first terminal to join the first session.
  • the UPF receives the second indication information, and the UPF binds the first terminal to the IP address in the IP address set.
  • the first session in the present application may include only one QoS flow, and the terminals in the terminal group share the QoS flow.
  • the first terminal in this embodiment of the present application joins the first session It can also be understood that the first terminal joins the QoS flow.
  • the first session includes multiple QoS flows.
  • the UPF receives the second indication information, since the second indication information is new information, the UPF can determine according to the second indication information The first terminal joins the QoS flow corresponding to the terminal group.
  • the second indication information may also directly indicate which QoS flow of the first session the first terminal has joined, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method further includes:
  • the UPF adjusts the PDR according to the second indication information.
  • each terminal independently establishes a PDU session. Therefore, each terminal uses one QoS flow, and each QoS flow has a fixed bandwidth. In this application, multiple terminals can share a QoS flow. The more terminals, the more bandwidth required. For example, if one terminal needs 2M bandwidth, then two terminals need 4M bandwidth. Correspondingly, three terminals need to 6M bandwidth is required, and so on. Therefore, when a new terminal joins the first session, the UPF and the access network equipment need to increase the bandwidth of the QoS flow. Similarly, when a new terminal exits the first session, the UPF and the access network equipment need to reduce the bandwidth of the QoS flow.
  • this method can also include:
  • the access network device allocates an IP address to the first terminal according to the IP address set.
  • the access network device sends the IP address allocated for the first terminal to the first terminal.
  • the IP addresses of the terminals in the terminal group can be allocated by AMF and then sent to the terminals through the access network devices accessed by the terminals.
  • the method can also include:
  • the access network device sends an IP address request to the AMF, where the IP address request is used to request an IP address for the first terminal.
  • the AMF receives the IP address request from the access network device.
  • the AMF allocates an IP address to the first terminal according to the IP address set.
  • the AMF sends the IP address allocated for the first terminal to the access network device.
  • the access network device receives the IP address allocated by the AMF for the first terminal from the AMF.
  • the access network device sends the IP address allocated for the first terminal to the first terminal.
  • the access network device when the access network device sends the IP address and the session context of the terminal group to the first terminal, it may carry the IP address and the session context of the terminal group in the same message and send it to the first terminal, or may carry the IP address and the session context of the terminal group in the same message. It is sent to the first terminal in different messages, which is not limited in this application.
  • the IP address set may also be allocated by the UPF.
  • the IP address set obtained by the AMF is sent by the UPF to the SMF, and then sent by the SMF to the AMF.
  • the SMF does not need to send the IP address set to the UPF anymore.
  • the method further includes:
  • the AMF obtains, according to the context of the third terminal, the identity of the access network device accessed by the third terminal and the identity of the third terminal.
  • the AMF sends third indication information to the access network device accessed by the third terminal, where the third indication information is used to instruct the third terminal to stop working.
  • the third indication information may include information indicating stop working and an identifier of the third terminal, thereby instructing the third terminal to stop working.
  • the access network device accessed by the third terminal receives the third indication information from the AMF, and determines that the third terminal stops working according to the third indication information.
  • the access network device releases the connection with the third terminal (eg, RRC connection).
  • the third terminal eg, RRC connection
  • the method further includes:
  • the AMF reclaims the IP address of the third terminal.
  • the UPF may be informed that the third terminal leaves the first session through the following manner 1 or manner 2.
  • Method 1 includes:
  • the access network device accessed by the third terminal sends sixth indication information and fourth indication information to the UPF serving the access network device, and the fourth indication information is used to instruct the UPF third terminal to leave the first session, the sixth indication information is used to indicate the IP address of the third terminal.
  • the UPF receives the sixth indication information and the fourth indication information.
  • the second method includes:
  • the AMF receives the sixth indication information from the access network device accessed by the third terminal.
  • the AMF sends fourth indication information and sixth indication information to the UPF serving the access network device accessed by the third terminal through the SMF, and the fourth indication information is used to instruct the UPF to leave the first session by the third terminal , and the sixth indication information is used to indicate the IP address of the third terminal.
  • the UPF receives the sixth indication information and the fourth indication information.
  • the above-mentioned sixth indication information may be the IP address of the third terminal, or may be an identifier of the IP address of the third terminal, for example, the number or serial number corresponding to the IP address of the third terminal, and the number or serial number may indicate the third terminal.
  • the first session in the present application may include only one QoS flow, and the terminals in the terminal group share the QoS flow.
  • the third terminal in this embodiment of the present application leaves the first session It can also be understood that the third terminal leaves the QoS flow.
  • the first session includes multiple QoS flows.
  • the UPF after the UPF receives the fourth indication information, since the fourth indication information is new information, the UPF can determine according to the fourth indication information What the third terminal leaves is the QoS flow corresponding to the terminal group.
  • the fourth indication information may also directly indicate which QoS flow of the first session the third terminal has left, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method further includes step 17-1) and/or step 17-2):
  • the UPF reclaims the IP address of the third terminal according to the fourth indication information and the sixth indication information.
  • the UPF adjusts the PDR according to the fourth indication information.
  • the above-mentioned method further includes:
  • the access network device adjusts the QoS profile of the first QoS flow according to the number of terminals currently accessing the access network device in the terminal group and the session context of the terminal group. For example, if the bandwidth in the session context of the terminal group is 2M, and the number of terminals accessing the access network device is 5, the access network device can adjust the bandwidth in the current QoS profile to 10M.
  • the bandwidth information may be a maximum flow rate (maximum flow bit rate, MFBR) or a guaranteed flow rate (guaranteed flow bit rate, GFBR), which is not limited here.
  • the SMF after acquiring the PCC rule, the SMF can generate a QoS profile according to the PCC rule, and send the QoS profile to the access network device.
  • the AMF or the access network device assigns the IP address to the terminal, and when the UPF binds the IP address to the terminal, the assignment and binding are performed in sequence according to the sequence of the IP addresses in the IP address set.
  • the sequence of addresses may specifically include the following, and of course, other sequences may be used, which are not limited in this application.
  • the IP address set includes 3 IP addresses, they are 10.2.2.2.3, 10.2.2.2.4, and 10.2.2.2.5 respectively. Then, the AMF or the access network device can assign IP addresses to the terminals in the order of 10.2.2.2.3-10.2.2.2.4-10.2.2.2.5. Similarly, the UPF can follow the order of 10.2.2.2.3-10.2.2.2 The sequence of .4-10.2.2.2.5 is the terminal binding IP address.
  • the second type front-to-back or back-to-front order in the IP address table.
  • the IP address set includes three IP addresses as shown in Table 2. If the order of IP addresses is from front to back in the IP address table. Then, the AMF or the access network device can assign IP addresses to the terminals in the order of 10.2.2.2.3-10.2.2.2.4-10.2.2.2.5. Similarly, the UPF can follow the order of 10.2.2.2.3-10.2.2.2 The sequence of .4-10.2.2.2.5 is the terminal binding IP address.
  • the third type according to the order of the numbers corresponding to the IP addresses from large to small or from small to large.
  • the IP address set includes three IP addresses as shown in Table 3. If the order of the IP addresses is the order of the numbers corresponding to the IP addresses from small to large. Then, the AMF or the access network device can assign IP addresses to the terminals in the order of 10.2.2.2.3-10.2.2.2.4-10.2.2.2.5. Similarly, the UPF can follow the order of 10.2.2.2.3-10.2.2.2 The sequence of .4-10.2.2.2.5 is the terminal binding IP address.
  • IP address 1 10.2.2.2.3 2 10.2.2.2.4 3 10.2.2.2.5
  • Embodiments 1 to 7 are used to illustrate the methods provided by the foregoing embodiments of the present application.
  • Embodiment 1 describes the process in which the AMF determines whether to send the first indication information to the camera according to whether the session context of the camera group is delivered to the access network device connected to the camera during the camera registration process.
  • Embodiment 1 includes:
  • the camera After the camera is installed and powered on, the camera sends a registration request to the AMF.
  • the registration request may include a camera identifier.
  • the camera can communicate with the AMF through the access network device.
  • the AMF performs a registration procedure (registration procedure) by interacting with other network elements.
  • the AMF determines the camera group to which the camera belongs according to the camera identifier, and determines whether the session context of the camera group is delivered to the access network device to which the camera is connected.
  • step 304 is performed;
  • the AMF sends a registration response to the camera, where the registration response includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to instruct the camera to obtain the session context of the camera group from the connected access network device.
  • the AMF sends a registration response to the camera.
  • both the registration request and the registration response may be NAS messages.
  • step 302 and step 303 are executed in no particular order.
  • Embodiment 2 exemplifies the process of establishing a session for the first camera in the camera group (referred to as camera 1) when the M access network devices are one access network device. In this case, camera 1 is registering. During the process, the first indication information is not received.
  • the method provided by Embodiment 2 includes:
  • the camera 1 sends a second message to the AMF through the access network device.
  • the AMF receives the second message from the camera 1 through the access network device.
  • the second message is used to request to establish a PDU session for the camera 1, and the second message may be a NAS message.
  • the second message may be a PDU session establishment request (PDU session establishment request).
  • the AMF determines that the camera 1 is the first camera in the camera group that requests to establish a PDU session.
  • the AMF can determine whether other cameras in the camera group have requested to establish a PDU session, and if not, determine that camera 1 is the first camera in the camera group that requests to establish a PDU session.
  • the AMF can determine whether camera 1 is the first camera in the camera group to request the establishment of a PDU session according to the information of the camera group (for example, the information of which cameras belong to the same camera group, the location information of the cameras, etc.).
  • the AMF may acquire the contract information including the information of the camera group in the registration process of the camera 1, and may also execute it before step 402, which is not limited in this application.
  • the AMF sends a third message to the SMF. Accordingly, the SMF receives the third message from the AMF.
  • the third message carries the identifier of the camera group, and the third message is used to request the session context of the camera group.
  • the third message may be a PDU session context establishment request (Nsmf_PDUSession_CreateSMContext Request) sent to the SMF.
  • the SMF sends fifth indication information to the PCF, where the fifth indication information is used to instruct the PCF to formulate a corresponding PCC rule for the camera group.
  • the PCF receives the fifth indication information from the SMF.
  • the fifth indication information may include the identification of the camera group.
  • the PCF sends the PCC rule formulated for the camera group to the SMF according to the fifth indication information.
  • the SMF receives the PCC rules formulated by the PCF for the camera group from the PCF.
  • the PCF may formulate the PCC rule for the camera group according to the fifth instruction information.
  • Steps 404 and 405 may be implemented in a session management policy association establishment (SM policy association establishment)/session management policy association modification (SM policy association modification) process.
  • SM policy association establishment session management policy association establishment
  • SM policy association modification session management policy association modification
  • the SMF allocates an IP address set to the camera group.
  • the SMF sends the IP address set and the corresponding PDR to the UPF through the N4 session flow. Accordingly, the UPF receives the IP address set and the corresponding PDR from the SMF.
  • the UPF is a UPF that serves the access network device connected to the camera 1 .
  • the SMF may generate the PDR corresponding to the UPF according to the PCC rule.
  • the UPF may save the IP address set and the corresponding PDR.
  • the N4 session process may be an N4 session establishment (N4 session establishment) process or an N4 session modification (N4 session modification) process.
  • the SMF sends the session context and IP address set of the camera group to the AMF. Accordingly, the AMF receives the session context and IP address set of the camera group from the SMF.
  • the SMF can generate the QoS rule corresponding to the camera group according to the PCC rule, and then generate other information in the session context of the camera group according to other information, and then send the session context of the camera group to the AMF.
  • the session context and IP address set of the camera group may be carried in the N1N2 transfer message (Namf_communication N1N2message transfer) sent to the AMF.
  • the AMF sends the session context of the camera group and the N1 SM container and the N2 SM container from the SMF side to the access network device.
  • the access network device receives the session context of the camera group and the N1 SM container and the N2 SM container from the SMF side.
  • the N1 SM container may include a PDU session establishment accept message, and the PDU session establishment accept message includes the session context of the camera 1.
  • the N2 SM container may include the QoS profile, IP address set and terminal group identifier generated by the SMF for the access network device.
  • the session context of the camera group may be located in the N2 SM container or outside the N2 SM container, and any one or more of the IP address set and the identifier of the terminal group may also be located outside the N2 SM container, which is not limited in this application.
  • the access network device After receiving the session context and IP address set of the camera group, the access network device saves the session context and IP address set of the camera group.
  • the session context and IP address set of the camera group can be carried in the N2 PDU session request (N2 PDUsession request).
  • the access network device sends a PDU session establishment acceptance message to the camera 1 .
  • the camera 1 receives the PDU session establishment accept message, and obtains the session context of the camera 1 according to the information in the PDU session establishment accept message.
  • the access network device and the UPF may exchange tunnel information (eg, tunnel address information) through AMF and SMF, so as to transmit uplink and downlink data.
  • tunnel information eg, tunnel address information
  • Embodiment 3 is an example of the process of establishing a session with other cameras (denoted as camera 2) after the first camera in the camera group (that is, camera 1) establishes a session when the M access network devices are one access network device.
  • the camera 2 receives the first indication information during the registration process.
  • the method provided by Embodiment 3 includes:
  • the camera 2 sends an RRC message to the access network device, where the RRC message includes the identifier of the camera group to which the camera 2 belongs.
  • the access network device receives the RRC message from the camera 2 .
  • the access network device determines whether there is a session context and an IP address set of the camera group according to the identifier of the camera group in the RRC message.
  • the access network device sends a response message of the RRC message to the camera 2.
  • the response message includes the session context of the camera group and the IP address assigned to camera 2 .
  • the response message also includes an identifier of the camera group.
  • the response message includes an indication message, which can instruct Camera 2 to perform the existing PDU session establishment process or indicate that Camera 2 has not acquired the camera group session context.
  • the access network device adjusts the QoS profile of the first QoS flow according to the number of cameras currently accessing the access network device in the camera group and the session context of the camera group.
  • the access network device may increase the bandwidth in the QoS profile of the first QoS flow by 3M.
  • the access network device sends second indication information to the UPF that provides the service for the access network device, where the second indication information is used to instruct the UPF camera 2 to join the first session.
  • the UPF receives the second indication information from the access network device.
  • the access network device may add the second indication information at a general packet radio service tunneling protocol (GTP) layer (for example, a GTP-user plane (GTP-user plane, GTP-U) layer).
  • GTP general packet radio service tunneling protocol
  • the UPF adjusts the PDR of the first QoS flow, and binds the IP address in the IP address set with the camera 2 .
  • the method for adjusting the PDR of the first QoS flow by the UPF is similar to that of the access network device, and details are not repeated here.
  • the method provided by Embodiment 3 includes:
  • the camera 2 sends an RRC message to the access network device, where the RRC message includes the NAS information for requesting the establishment of the PDU session and the identifier of the camera group to which the camera 2 belongs.
  • the access network device determines whether there is a session context and an IP address set of the camera group according to the identifier of the camera group in the RRC message.
  • step 603 If yes, go to step 603, if not, go to step 604 and step 605.
  • the access network device sends a response message of the RRC message to the camera 2 , where the response message of the RRC message includes the session context of the camera group and the IP address assigned to the camera 2 .
  • the access network device sends the NAS information in the RRC message for requesting the establishment of the PDU session to the AMF.
  • the access network device will save the session context and IP address set of the camera group again, and send the session context of the camera 2 and the IP address assigned to the camera 2 to the camera 2, or transfer the The PDU session establishment accept message is sent to camera 2.
  • the PDU session establishment accept message includes the session context of the camera group and the IP address assigned to the camera 2 .
  • Steps 606 to 608 are the same as the above steps 504 to 506 respectively.
  • Embodiment 4 exemplifies the process of establishing a session for the first camera in the camera group (denoted as camera 1) when the M access network devices are multiple access network devices. During the registration process, the first indication information is not received.
  • the method provided by Embodiment 4 includes:
  • steps 401 to 408 are the same as steps 401 to 408 respectively.
  • the AMF stores the IP address set.
  • the AMF sends the session context of the camera group and the N1 SM container and the N2 SM container from the SMF side to the access network device.
  • the access network device receives the session context of the camera group and the N1 SM container and the N2 SM container from the SMF side.
  • the N1 SM container may include a PDU session establishment accept message, and the PDU session establishment accept message includes the session context of the camera 1.
  • the N2 SM container may include the QoS profile generated by the SMF for the access network device and the identifier of the terminal group.
  • the session context of the camera group may be located in the N2 SM container or outside the N2 SM container, and the identifier of the terminal group may also be located outside the N2 SM container, which is not limited in this application.
  • the access network device sends a PDU session establishment acceptance message to the camera 1 .
  • the camera 1 receives the PDU session establishment accept message, and obtains the session context of the camera 1 according to the information in the PDU session establishment accept message.
  • the AMF sends the session context of the camera group to M-1 access network devices (except the access network device connected to camera 1). Accordingly, each access network device receives and stores the session context of the camera group from the AMF.
  • the AMF may determine, according to the location information of the cameras, which access network devices the cameras in the camera group are located within the coverage range.
  • the access network device and the UPF may exchange tunnel information (eg, tunnel address information) through AMF and SMF, so as to transmit uplink and downlink data.
  • tunnel information eg, tunnel address information
  • Embodiment 5 In the case where the M access network devices are multiple access network devices, after the first camera in the camera group (that is, camera 1) establishes a session, the process of establishing sessions for other cameras (denoted as camera 2) is as follows. For example, in this case, the camera 2 receives the first indication information during the registration process.
  • the method provided by Embodiment 5 includes:
  • the camera 2 sends an RRC message to the access network device, where the RRC message includes the identifier of the camera group to which the camera 2 belongs.
  • the access network device receives the RRC message from the camera 2 .
  • the access network device determines, according to the identifier of the camera group in the RRC message, whether there is a session context and an IP address set of the camera group.
  • step 803 to step 806 are performed. If the access network device does not have the session context and IP address set of the camera group, step 807 is performed.
  • the access network device requests the IP address of the camera 2 from the AMF through the N2 session process.
  • the AMF assigns an IP address to the camera 2 according to the IP address set.
  • the AMF sends the IP address allocated for the camera 2 to the access network device.
  • the access network device sends a response message of the RRC message to the camera 2 , where the response message includes the session context of the camera group and the IP address assigned to the camera 2 .
  • the access network device sends a response message of the RRC message to the camera 2, where the response message includes an indication information, and the indication information can instruct the camera 2 to perform the existing PDU session establishment process or indicate that the camera 2 has not acquired the session of the camera group context.
  • the method provided by Embodiment 5 includes:
  • the camera 2 sends an RRC message to the access network device, where the RRC message includes the NAS information for requesting the establishment of the PDU session and the identifier of the camera group to which the camera 2 belongs.
  • the access network device determines whether there is a session context and an IP address set of the camera group according to the identifier of the camera group in the RRC message.
  • step 903 to step 906 are performed. If the access network device does not have the session context and IP address set of the camera group, step 907 and step 908 are performed.
  • the access network device sends the NAS information in the RRC message for requesting the establishment of the PDU session to the AMF.
  • the access network device will save the session context of the camera group again, and send the session context of camera 2 and the IP address assigned by AMF to camera 2 to camera 2, or establish a PDU session from the core network. Accept the message to send to camera 2.
  • the PDU session establishment accept message includes the session context of the camera group and the IP address assigned by the AMF to the camera 2 .
  • the implementation process of step 908 can be understood by referring to the process of establishing a session by the first terminal in the terminal group, and details are not repeated here.
  • Embodiment 6 When the M access network devices are one access network device, when the camera in the camera group (referred to as camera 3) stops working, it is necessary to delete the corresponding session context information, release the RRC connection and perform QoS flow. QoS adjustment of the QoS, and these processes are exemplified below.
  • the method provided by Embodiment 6 includes:
  • the AF instructs the UDM to delete the camera 3 from the information of the camera group, the UDM modifies the subscription data of the camera 3 according to the instruction, and the UDM notifies the SMF of the modified subscription data of the camera 3.
  • the UDM can notify the SMF of the modified subscription data of the camera 3 through Nudm_SDM_notification, and the SMF can determine that the camera 3 no longer belongs to the camera group according to the modified subscription data of the camera 3 .
  • the camera 3 may stop working due to various reasons, for example, the external physical entity is damaged, and for example, AF or a third party wants the camera 3 to stop working. If the third party wants the camera 3 to stop working, the third party can notify the AF. In the subsequent process, when the camera 3 can work normally, the AF can instruct the UDM to re-add the camera 3 to the camera group. 1002. The AF sends notification information to the SMF, where the notification information is used to notify the SMF that the camera 3 stops working.
  • the notification information may include identity information of the camera 3 and information indicating to stop working.
  • the identity information of the camera 3 may be a user permanent identifier (subscriber permanent identifier, SUPI) of the camera 3 .
  • SUPI subscriber permanent identifier
  • AF can communicate with SMF via NEF.
  • step 1001 and step 1002 may be executed.
  • the SMF notifies the SUPI of the AMF camera 3 .
  • the SUPI of camera 3 can be carried in Namf_Communication_N1N2MessageTransfer.
  • the AMF determines, according to the SUPI of the camera 3 and the session context of the camera 3, the access network device that the camera 3 accesses and the temporary mobile subscriber identity (S-Temporary mobile subscriber identity, S-TMSI) of the camera 3.
  • S-Temporary mobile subscriber identity S-TMSI
  • the SUPI of the camera 3 since the SUPI of the camera 3 cannot be recognized by the access network device, the SUPI of the camera 3 needs to be converted into S-TMSI and then sent to the access network device.
  • the AMF informs the access network device of the S-TMSI of the camera 3 through the N2 session process.
  • the S-TMSI of the camera 3 can be carried in the N2 PDU session request (N2 PDU session request).
  • the access network device executes RRC connection release (release), and informs the camera 3 to delete the session context.
  • the access network device adjusts the QoS profile of the first QoS flow, and reclaims the IP address of the camera 3.
  • the access network device sends the IP address of the camera 3 to the SMF through the AMF.
  • the IP address of the camera 3 sent by the access network device to the AMF can be carried in the N2 PDU session response (N2 PDU session response), and the IP address of the camera 3 sent by the AMF to the SMF can be carried in the PDU session update sent to the SMF.
  • context Nsmf_PDU session updateSMcontext
  • the SMF informs the UPF of the IP address of the camera 3 through the N4 session process.
  • the N4 session process may be an N4 session modification process.
  • the access network device may also directly send the IP address of the camera 3 to the UPF.
  • the UPF adjusts the PDR of the first QoS flow, and reclaims the IP address of the camera 3 .
  • Embodiment 7 In the case where the M access network devices are multiple access network devices, when the camera in the camera group (referred to as camera 3) stops working, it is necessary to delete the corresponding session context information, release the RRC connection and perform QoS. QoS adjustment of the flow, these processes are exemplified below.
  • the method provided by Embodiment 7 includes:
  • steps 1001 to 1003 are the same as steps 1001 to 1003 respectively.
  • the AMF determines the access network device connected to the camera 3 and the S-TMSI of the camera 3 according to the SUPI of the camera 3 and the session context of the camera 3, and reclaims the IP address of the camera 3 at the same time.
  • the access network device adjusts the QoS profile of the first QoS flow.
  • the AMF sends the IP address of the camera 3 to the SMF.
  • step 1109-1110 are the same as step 1009 and step 1010, respectively.
  • This application abandons the original complex signaling interaction scheme for each terminal to establish a PDU session.
  • the core network will directly generate the corresponding session context and IP address set for the terminal group, and Send the session context to the access network device, and other terminals in the subsequent terminal group can directly interact with the access network device to realize the establishment of the PDU session or the SR process, and send the IP address set to the AMF (when M>1) or the connection.
  • each network element such as SMF, AMF, UPF, access network equipment, and terminal, includes at least one of corresponding hardware structures and software modules for performing each function in order to implement the above functions.
  • SMF Session Management Function
  • AMF Access Management Function
  • UPF User Plane Function
  • access network equipment and terminal
  • each network element includes at least one of corresponding hardware structures and software modules for performing each function in order to implement the above functions.
  • the present application can be implemented in hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software with the units and algorithm steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein. Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each particular application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
  • each functional unit may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be divided integrated in one processing unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated units may be implemented in the form of hardware, or may be implemented in the form of software functional units. It should be noted that the division of units in the embodiments of the present application is illustrative, and is only a logical function division, and other division methods may be used in actual implementation.
  • FIG. 12 shows a possible schematic structural diagram of the communication device (referred to as the communication device 120 ) involved in the above-mentioned embodiment, where the communication device 120 includes a processing unit 1201 and a communication unit 1202 .
  • a storage unit 1203 is also included.
  • the communication apparatus 120 may be used to illustrate the structures of the SMF, AMF, UPF, access network equipment, and terminal in the foregoing embodiments.
  • the processing unit 1201 is used to control and manage the actions of the SMF, for example, the processing unit 1201 is used to execute 403- 408, 703-708 in Fig. 7, 1002, 1003, 1008 and 1009 in Fig. 10, 1102, 1103, 1108 and 1109 in Fig. 11, and/or SMF in other processes described in the examples of this application Action performed.
  • the processing unit 1201 may communicate with other network entities through the communication unit 1202, for example, with the AMF in FIG. 4 .
  • the storage unit 1203 is used to store program codes and data of the SMF.
  • the processing unit 1201 is used to control and manage the actions of the AMF, for example, the processing unit 1201 is used to execute 201- 203, 301-305 in Fig. 3, 401-403, 408 and 409 in Fig. 4, 604 in Fig. 6, 701-703, 708-710, 712 in Fig. 7, 803-805 in Fig. 8, 903-905, 907 in FIG. 9, 1003-1005, 1008 in FIG. 10, 1103-1105, 1108 in FIG. 11, and/or actions performed by the AMF in other processes described in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the processing unit 1201 may communicate with other network entities through the communication unit 1202, for example, with the SMF in FIG. 4 .
  • the storage unit 1203 is used to store program codes and data of the AMF.
  • the processing unit 1201 is used to control and manage the actions of the UPF.
  • the processing unit 1201 is used to execute 407 in FIG. 4 , 505, 506 in Figure 5, 607, 608 in Figure 6, 707 in Figure 7, 809, 810 in Figure 8, 910, 911 in Figure 9, 1009, 1010 in Figure 10, Figure 11 Actions performed by the UPF in 1109, 1110, and/or other processes described in the embodiments of this application.
  • the processing unit 1201 may communicate with other network entities through the communication unit 1202, for example, with the SMF in FIG. 4 .
  • the storage unit 1203 is used to store program codes and data of the UPF.
  • the processing unit 1201 is used to control and manage the actions of the access network equipment, for example, the processing unit 1201 is used to execute 203 in Fig. 2 (at this time, the access network device is any one of the M access network devices), 301, 304, 305 in Fig. 3, 401, 409, 410 in Fig. 4, 501-505 in Fig. 5, 601-607 in Fig. 6, 701, 710, 711 in Fig. 7, 801-803, 805-809 in Fig. 8, 901-903, 905-910 in Fig. 9, Actions performed by the access network device in 1005-1008 in FIG. 10, 1105-1107 in FIG.
  • the processing unit 1201 may communicate with other network entities through the communication unit 1202, for example, with the AMF in FIG. 4 .
  • the storage unit 1203 is used to store program codes and data of the access network equipment.
  • the processing unit 1201 is used to control and manage the actions of the terminal, for example, the processing unit 1201 is used to execute 202 ( At this time, the terminal is terminal A), 301, 304, 305 in FIG. 3 (at this time, the terminal is a camera), 401, 410 in FIG. 4 (at this time, the terminal is camera 1), 501, 501 in FIG.
  • the processing unit 1201 may communicate with other network entities through the communication unit 1202, for example, communicate with the access network device in FIG. 4 .
  • the storage unit 1203 is used to store program codes and data of the terminal.
  • the communication apparatus 120 may be a device or a chip or a chip system.
  • the processing unit 1201 may be a processor; the communication unit 1202 may be a communication interface, a transceiver, or an input interface and/or an output interface.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input interface may be an input circuit, and the output interface may be an output circuit.
  • the communication unit 1202 may be a communication interface, input interface and/or output interface, interface circuit, output circuit, input circuit, pin or related circuit, etc. on the chip or chip system.
  • the processing unit 1201 may be a processor, a processing circuit, a logic circuit, or the like.
  • the integrated units in FIG. 12 may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium if implemented in the form of software functional modules and sold or used as independent products.
  • the medium includes several instructions to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) or a processor (processor) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • Storage media for storing computer software products include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or CD, etc. that can store program codes medium.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of a communication device, see FIG. 13 or FIG. 14 , the communication device includes a processor 1301 , and optionally, a memory 1302 connected to the processor 1301 .
  • the processor 1301 may be a general-purpose central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more processors used to control the execution of the programs of the present application. integrated circuit.
  • the processor 1301 may also include multiple CPUs, and the processor 1301 may be a single-core (single-CPU) processor or a multi-core (multi-CPU) processor.
  • a processor herein may refer to one or more devices, circuits, or processing cores for processing data (eg, computer program instructions).
  • the memory 1302 can be a ROM or other type of static storage device that can store static information and instructions, a RAM or other type of dynamic storage device that can store information and instructions, or an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory.
  • read-only memory EEPROM
  • CD-ROM compact disc read-only memory
  • optical disc storage including compact disc, laser disc, optical disc, digital versatile disc, Blu-ray disc, etc.
  • magnetic disk A storage medium or other magnetic storage device, or any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer, is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the memory 1302 may exist independently (in this case, the processor may be located outside the communication device, or may be located in the communication device), or may be integrated with the processor 1301 . Among them, the memory 1302 may contain computer program code.
  • the processor 1301 is configured to execute the computer program codes stored in the memory 1302, so as to implement the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus further includes a transceiver 1303 .
  • the processor 1301, the memory 1302 and the transceiver 1303 are connected by a bus.
  • the transceiver 1303 is used to communicate with other devices or communication networks.
  • the transceiver 1303 may include a transmitter and a receiver.
  • a device in the transceiver 1303 for implementing the receiving function may be regarded as a receiver, and the receiver is configured to perform the receiving steps in the embodiments of the present application.
  • a device in the transceiver 1303 for implementing the sending function may be regarded as a transmitter, and the transmitter is used to perform the sending step in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 13 may be used to illustrate the structures of the SMF, AMF, UPF, access network equipment, and terminal involved in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the processor 1301 is used to control and manage the actions of the SMF, for example, the processor 1301 is used to execute 403- 408, 703-708 in Fig. 7, 1002, 1003, 1008 and 1009 in Fig. 10, 1102, 1103, 1108 and 1109 in Fig. 11, and/or SMF in other processes described in the examples of this application Action performed.
  • the processor 1301 may communicate with other network entities through the transceiver 1303, eg, with the AMF in FIG. 4 .
  • Memory 1302 is used to store program codes and data for the SMF.
  • the processor 1301 is used to control and manage the actions of the AMF, for example, the processor 1301 is used to execute 201- 203, 301-305 in Fig. 3, 401-403, 408 and 409 in Fig. 4, 604 in Fig. 6, 701-703, 708-710, 712 in Fig. 7, 803-805 in Fig. 8, 903-905, 907 in FIG. 9, 1003-1005, 1008 in FIG. 10, 1103-1105, 1108 in FIG. 11, and/or actions performed by the AMF in other processes described in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the processor 1301 may communicate with other network entities through the transceiver 1303, eg, with the SMF in FIG. 4 .
  • the memory 1302 is used to store program codes and data of the AMF.
  • the processor 1301 is used to control and manage the actions of the UPF, for example, the processor 1301 is used to execute 407 in FIG. 4 , 505, 506 in Figure 5, 607, 608 in Figure 6, 707 in Figure 7, 809, 810 in Figure 8, 910, 911 in Figure 9, 1009, 1010 in Figure 10, Figure 11 Actions performed by the UPF in 1109, 1110, and/or other processes described in the embodiments of this application.
  • the processor 1301 may communicate with other network entities through the transceiver 1303, eg, with the SMF in FIG. 4 .
  • Memory 1302 is used to store program codes and data for the UPF.
  • the processor 1301 is used to control and manage the actions of the access network equipment, for example, the processor 1301 is used to execute 203 in Fig. 2 (at this time, the access network device is any one of the M access network devices), 301, 304, 305 in Fig. 3, 401, 409, 410 in Fig. 4, 501-505 in Fig. 5, 601-607 in Fig. 6, 701, 710, 711 in Fig. 7, 801-803, 805-809 in Fig. 8, 901-903, 905-910 in Fig. 9, Actions performed by the access network device in 1005-1008 in FIG. 10, 1105-1107 in FIG.
  • the processor 1301 may communicate with other network entities through the transceiver 1303, eg, with the AMF in FIG. 4 .
  • the memory 1302 is used to store program codes and data of the access network equipment.
  • the processor 1301 is used to control and manage the actions of the terminal, for example, the processor 1301 is used to execute 202 ( At this time, the terminal is terminal A), 301, 304, 305 in FIG. 3 (at this time, the terminal is a camera), 401, 410 in FIG. 4 (at this time, the terminal is camera 1), 501, 501 in FIG.
  • the processor 1301 may communicate with other network entities through the transceiver 1303, eg, with the access network device in FIG. 4 .
  • the memory 1302 is used to store program codes and data of the terminal.
  • the processor 1301 includes a logic circuit and at least one of an input interface and an output interface.
  • the output interface is used for performing the sending action in the corresponding method
  • the input interface is used for performing the receiving action in the corresponding method.
  • FIG. 14 Based on the second possible implementation manner, see FIG. 14 .
  • the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 14 may be used to illustrate the structures of the SMF, AMF, UPF, access network equipment, and terminal involved in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the processor 1301 is used to control and manage the actions of the SMF, for example, the processor 1301 is used to execute 403- 408, 703-708 in Fig. 7, 1002, 1003, 1008 and 1009 in Fig. 10, 1102, 1103, 1108 and 1109 in Fig. 11, and/or SMF in other processes described in the examples of this application Action performed.
  • the processor 1301 may communicate with other network entities, eg, with the AMF in FIG. 4 , through at least one of an input interface and an output interface.
  • Memory 1302 is used to store program codes and data for the SMF.
  • the processor 1301 is used to control and manage the actions of the AMF, for example, the processor 1301 is used to execute the steps 201- 203, 301-305 in Fig. 3, 401-403, 408 and 409 in Fig. 4, 604 in Fig. 6, 701-703, 708-710, 712 in Fig. 7, 803-805 in Fig. 8, 903-905, 907 in FIG. 9, 1003-1005, 1008 in FIG. 10, 1103-1105, 1108 in FIG. 11, and/or actions performed by the AMF in other processes described in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the processor 1301 may communicate with other network entities, eg, with the SMF in FIG. 4 , through at least one of an input interface and an output interface.
  • the memory 1302 is used to store program codes and data of the AMF.
  • the processor 1301 is used to control and manage the actions of the UPF, for example, the processor 1301 is used to execute 407 in FIG. 4 , 505, 506 in Figure 5, 607, 608 in Figure 6, 707 in Figure 7, 809, 810 in Figure 8, 910, 911 in Figure 9, 1009, 1010 in Figure 10, Figure 11 Actions performed by the UPF in 1109, 1110, and/or other processes described in the embodiments of this application.
  • the processor 1301 may communicate with other network entities, eg, with the SMF in FIG. 4 , through at least one of an input interface and an output interface.
  • Memory 1302 is used to store program codes and data for the UPF.
  • the processor 1301 is used to control and manage the actions of the access network equipment, for example, the processor 1301 is used to execute 203 in Fig. 2 (at this time, the access network device is any one of the M access network devices), 301, 304, 305 in Fig. 3, 401, 409, 410 in Fig. 4, 501-505 in Fig. 5, 601-607 in Fig. 6, 701, 710, 711 in Fig. 7, 801-803, 805-809 in Fig. 8, 901-903, 905-910 in Fig. 9, Actions performed by the access network device in 1005-1008 in FIG. 10, 1105-1107 in FIG.
  • the processor 1301 may communicate with other network entities, eg, with the AMF in FIG. 4 , through at least one of an input interface and an output interface.
  • the memory 1302 is used to store program codes and data of the access network equipment.
  • the processor 1301 is used to control and manage the actions of the terminal, for example, the processor 1301 is used to execute 202 ( At this time, the terminal is terminal A), 301, 304, 305 in FIG. 3 (at this time, the terminal is a camera), 401, 410 in FIG. 4 (at this time, the terminal is camera 1), 501, 501 in FIG.
  • the processor 1301 may communicate with other network entities, eg, with the access network device in FIG. 4 , through at least one of an input interface and an output interface.
  • the memory 1302 is used to store program codes and data of the terminal.
  • each step in the method provided in this embodiment may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in a processor or an instruction in the form of software.
  • the steps of the methods disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer-readable storage medium, including instructions, which, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to execute any of the foregoing methods.
  • Embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product containing instructions, which, when run on a computer, enables the computer to execute any of the above methods.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, including: any one or more of SMF, AMF, UPF, access network equipment, and terminals.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a chip, including: a processor and an interface, where the processor is coupled to a memory through the interface, and when the processor executes a computer program or instruction in the memory, any one of the methods provided in the above embodiments is executed by the processor. implement.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
  • Computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website site, computer, server, or data center over a wire (e.g.
  • coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (eg infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means to transmit to another website site, computer, server or data center.
  • Computer-readable storage media can be any available media that can be accessed by a computer or data storage devices including one or more servers, data centers, etc., that can be integrated with the media.
  • Useful media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (eg, DVDs), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state disks (SSDs)), and the like.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Provided are a communication method and apparatus, which relate to the technical field of communications. The method comprises: an access network device receiving session context of a terminal group from a mobile management network element, and the access network device receiving a first message from a first terminal in the terminal group, and sending a first response to the first terminal according to the first message. The access network device is an access network device accessed by the first terminal, services of terminals in the terminal group have the same QoS requirement, the first message comprises an identifier of the terminal group, and the first response carries the session context of the terminal group. In the method, a mobile management network element sends session context of a terminal group to an access network device, and a terminal can then acquire, during a PDU session establishment flow or an SR flow, the session context of the terminal group only by means of interaction with the access network device accessed thereby, so as to avoid repeated signaling interaction, thereby greatly reducing tedious signaling interaction and effectively saving on network resources.

Description

通信方法及装置Communication method and device
本申请要求于2020年06月30日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202010617172.9、申请名称为“通信方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application with the application number 202010617172.9 and the application name "Communication Method and Device" filed with the State Intellectual Property Office on June 30, 2020, the entire contents of which are incorporated into this application by reference.
技术领域technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种通信方法及装置。The present application relates to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a communication method and apparatus.
背景技术Background technique
大规模机器类型通信(massive machine type communications,mMTC)是第五代(5th-generation,5G)系统的重要应用场景之一,主要面向基于蜂窝网络的各类物联网(internet of things,IoT)业务应用。mMTC应用场景中,会存在大规模海量物联网终端的连接,可达到每平方公里100万连接,对网络的架构和协议设计带来巨大挑战。此外,mMTC应用还具有低数据量(数十个字节的小数据包传输)、低功耗(物联网终端电池寿命可达10年)、深覆盖(支持各类弱覆盖场景,如地下车库、电梯井等)、低复杂度(降低终端和网络成本)等特征。Massive machine type communications (mMTC) is one of the important application scenarios of the 5th-generation (5G) system, mainly for various Internet of things (IoT) services based on cellular networks application. In the mMTC application scenario, there will be large-scale and massive IoT terminal connections, which can reach 1 million connections per square kilometer, which brings great challenges to the network architecture and protocol design. In addition, the mMTC application also has low data volume (small data packet transmission of tens of bytes), low power consumption (the battery life of IoT terminals can reach 10 years), deep coverage (supports various weak coverage scenarios, such as underground garages) , elevator shaft, etc.), low complexity (reduce terminal and network costs) and other features.
mMTC的典型应用场景包括视频监控(监控摄像头等)、工业传感器网络(如温度传感器、压力传感器等)、可穿戴设备(智能手环、智能手表、智能眼镜等)等,作为典型的mMTC场景,视频监控业务中,摄像头部署位置固定并进行持续的上行视频流传输,而且,每个摄像头的数据传输业务都是相同的视频流质量要求,也就是相同的服务质量(quality of service,QoS)。在视频监控场景下,每个摄像头都需要各自与网络建立连接,并进行协议数据单元(protocol data unit,PDU)会话创建与QoS参数的确定,对核心网造成了巨大的信令负担,导致网络资源的低效利用。Typical application scenarios of mMTC include video surveillance (surveillance cameras, etc.), industrial sensor networks (such as temperature sensors, pressure sensors, etc.), wearable devices (smart bracelets, smart watches, smart glasses, etc.), etc. As a typical mMTC scenario, In the video surveillance service, the camera is deployed at a fixed location and continuously transmits upstream video streams. Moreover, the data transmission service of each camera has the same video stream quality requirements, that is, the same quality of service (QoS). In the video surveillance scenario, each camera needs to establish a connection with the network, create a protocol data unit (PDU) session and determine the QoS parameters, which imposes a huge signaling burden on the core network and causes the network Inefficient use of resources.
发明内容SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法及装置,用于降低信令开销,提高资源利用率。Embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and apparatus, which are used to reduce signaling overhead and improve resource utilization.
为达到上述目的,本申请实施例提供了一些技术方案,这些技术方案涉及到的网元包括移动管理网元、会话管理网元、用户面网元、数据管理网元以及策略控制网元,以下以移动管理网元、会话管理网元、用户面网元、数据管理网元以及策略控制网元分别为AMF、SMF、UPF、UDM和PCF为例对本申请提供的技术方案进行示例性说明:In order to achieve the above purpose, the embodiments of the present application provide some technical solutions. The network elements involved in these technical solutions include mobility management network elements, session management network elements, user plane network elements, data management network elements, and policy control network elements, as follows: Taking the mobility management network element, session management network element, user plane network element, data management network element and policy control network element as AMF, SMF, UPF, UDM and PCF as examples to illustrate the technical solutions provided by this application:
第一方面,提供了一种通信方法,包括:接入网设备从AMF接收终端组的会话上下文和终端组的标识,终端组中的终端的业务具有相同的QoS需求;接入网设备从终端组中的第一终端接收第一消息,第一消息中包括终端组的标识,接入网设备为第一终端接入的接入网设备;接入网设备根据第一消息向第一终端发送第一响应,第一响应中携带终端组的会话上下文。现有技术中所有的终端都独立的进行PDU会话建立流程或者SR流程,忽略了终端的会话之间的关联,造成信令浪费。第一方面提供的方法,AMF将终端组的会话上下文发送给接入网设备,后续在PDU会话建立流程或SR流程中,终端只需要与接入的接入网设备交互即可获取到终端组的会话上下文,从而避免重复的信令交互,极大地减少繁琐的信令交互,有效节省网络资源。In a first aspect, a communication method is provided, including: an access network device receives a session context of a terminal group and an identifier of the terminal group from an AMF, and the services of the terminals in the terminal group have the same QoS requirements; The first terminal in the group receives the first message, the first message includes the identifier of the terminal group, and the access network device is the access network device accessed by the first terminal; the access network device sends the first terminal according to the first message The first response, where the session context of the terminal group is carried in the first response. In the prior art, all terminals independently perform the PDU session establishment process or the SR process, ignoring the association between the sessions of the terminals, resulting in waste of signaling. In the method provided by the first aspect, the AMF sends the session context of the terminal group to the access network device, and in the subsequent PDU session establishment process or SR process, the terminal only needs to interact with the accessed access network device to obtain the terminal group. Session context, thus avoiding repeated signaling interactions, greatly reducing tedious signaling interactions, and effectively saving network resources.
在一种可能的实现方式中,接入网设备从AMF接收终端组的会话上下文,包括:在终端组中的第二终端建立会话的过程中,接入网设备从AMF接收终端组的会话上下文和终端组的标识,第二终端为终端组中的首个请求建立会话的终端。该种可能的实现方式,在终端组中的首个终端建立会话的过程中,AMF将终端组的会话上下文发送给M个接入网设备,在其他终端注册过程中,终端只需要与接入的接入网设备交互即可获取到终端组的会话上下文,从而避免重复的信令交互,极大地减少繁琐的信令交互,有效节省网络资源。In a possible implementation manner, the access network device receiving the session context of the terminal group from the AMF includes: during the process of establishing a session by the second terminal in the terminal group, the access network device receives the session context of the terminal group from the AMF and the identifier of the terminal group, the second terminal is the first terminal in the terminal group that requests to establish a session. In this possible implementation, when the first terminal in the terminal group establishes a session, the AMF sends the session context of the terminal group to M access network devices. During the registration process of other terminals, the terminal only needs to communicate with the access network. The session context of the terminal group can be obtained by interacting with the access network devices of the terminal group, thereby avoiding repeated signaling interactions, greatly reducing tedious signaling interactions, and effectively saving network resources.
在一种可能的实现方式中,接入网设备从终端组中的第一终端接收第一消息,包括:在第一终端的会话建立过程中或服务请求过程中,接入网设备从第一终端接收第一消息。该种可能的实现方式,终端可以在多种场景下向接入网设备发送第一消息,加大了该方法的应用范围。In a possible implementation manner, the access network device receives the first message from the first terminal in the terminal group, including: during the session establishment process or the service request process of the first terminal, the access network device receives the first message from the first terminal. The terminal receives the first message. In this possible implementation manner, the terminal can send the first message to the access network device in various scenarios, which increases the application scope of the method.
在一种可能的实现方式中,终端组中的终端接入M个接入网设备,M=1,该方法还包括:接入网设备从AMF接收IP地址集;接入网设备根据IP地址集为第一终端分配IP地址;接入网设备向第一终端发送为第一终端分配的IP地址。该种可能的实现方式,由于终端组中的终端接入一个接入网设备,因此,AMF可以向该接入网设备发送IP地址集,从而由该接入网设备对终端组中的终端的IP地址进行统一的管理。In a possible implementation manner, the terminals in the terminal group access M access network devices, M=1, and the method further includes: the access network device receives an IP address set from the AMF; the access network device receives the IP address set according to the IP address The set allocates an IP address to the first terminal; the access network device sends the IP address allocated to the first terminal to the first terminal. In this possible implementation manner, since a terminal in a terminal group accesses an access network device, the AMF can send an IP address set to the access network device, so that the access network device can communicate with the terminals in the terminal group. Unified management of IP addresses.
在一种可能的实现方式中,终端组中的终端接入M个接入网设备,M>1,M为整数,接入网设备为M个接入网设备中的一个,该方法还包括:接入网设备向AMF发送IP地址请求,IP地址请求用于为第一终端请求IP地址;接入网设备从AMF接收AMF为第一终端分配的IP地址;接入网设备向第一终端发送AMF为第一终端分配的IP地址。该种可能的实现方式,由于终端组中的终端接入多个接入网设备,因此,可以由AMF进行统一的IP地址分配,以便对终端组中的终端的IP地址进行统一的管理。In a possible implementation manner, the terminals in the terminal group access M access network devices, where M>1, M is an integer, and the access network device is one of the M access network devices, and the method further includes : The access network device sends an IP address request to the AMF, and the IP address request is used to request an IP address for the first terminal; the access network device receives the IP address allocated by the AMF for the first terminal from the AMF; the access network device sends the first terminal to the The IP address assigned by the AMF to the first terminal is sent. In this possible implementation manner, since the terminals in the terminal group access multiple access network devices, the AMF can perform uniform IP address allocation, so as to uniformly manage the IP addresses of the terminals in the terminal group.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:接入网设备向为接入网设备提供服务的UPF发送第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示UPF第一终端加入第一会话,终端组中的终端共用第一会话中的一个QoS流,或者,终端组中的接入接入网设备的终端共用第一会话中的一个QoS流。该种可能的实现方式,可以使得UPF确定加入第一会话的终端,以便UPF进行IP地址的绑定。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the access network device sends second indication information to the UPF serving the access network device, where the second indication information is used to instruct the UPF first terminal to join the first session, The terminals in the terminal group share one QoS flow in the first session, or the terminals in the terminal group accessing the access network device share one QoS flow in the first session. In this possible implementation manner, the UPF can determine the terminal that joins the first session, so that the UPF can perform IP address binding.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在终端组中的、接入接入网设备的第三终端停止工作的情况下,该方法还包括:接入网设备向为接入网设备提供服务的UPF发送第六指示信息和第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示UPF第三终端离开第一会话,第六指示信息用于指示第三终端的IP地址,终端组中的终端共用第一会话中的一个QoS流,或者,终端组中的接入接入网设备的终端共用第一会话中的一个QoS流。该种可能的实现方式,可以使得UPF确定离开第一会话的终端,以便UPF进行IP地址的回收。In a possible implementation manner, in the case that the third terminal in the terminal group that accesses the access network device stops working, the method further includes: the access network device provides services to the UPF for the access network device to the UPF Send sixth indication information and fourth indication information, the fourth indication information is used to instruct the UPF third terminal to leave the first session, the sixth indication information is used to indicate the IP address of the third terminal, and the terminals in the terminal group share the first session One QoS flow in the first session, or the terminals accessing the access network device in the terminal group share one QoS flow in the first session. In this possible implementation manner, the UPF can determine the terminal that leaves the first session, so that the UPF can recover the IP address.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在终端组中的、接入接入网设备的第三终端停止工作的情况下,该方法还包括:接入网设备从AMF接收第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示第三终端停止工作;接入网设备释放与第三终端之间的连接。该种可能的实现方式,可以使得接入网设备确定停止工作的终端,从而释放相应的连接,释放网络资源。In a possible implementation manner, when the third terminal in the terminal group that accesses the access network device stops working, the method further includes: the access network device receives third indication information from the AMF, and the third The indication information is used to instruct the third terminal to stop working; the access network device releases the connection with the third terminal. In this possible implementation manner, the access network device can determine the terminal that stops working, thereby releasing the corresponding connection and releasing network resources.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:接入网设备根据终端组中的当前接入 接入网设备的终端个数和终端组的会话上下文,对QoS流的QoS配置文件进行调整。该种可能的实现方式,可以使得接入网设备根据当前的加入第一会话的终端个数进行QoS的执行规则的调整,以保证QoS流的正常传输。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the access network device adjusts the QoS profile of the QoS flow according to the number of terminals currently accessing the access network device in the terminal group and the session context of the terminal group . In this possible implementation manner, the access network device can adjust the QoS execution rules according to the current number of terminals joining the first session, so as to ensure the normal transmission of the QoS flow.
第二方面,提供了一种通信方法,包括:在终端的注册过程中,AMF判断终端所属的终端组的会话上下文是否下发给接入网设备,接入网设备为终端接入的接入网设备,终端组中的终端的业务具有相同的QoS需求;若是,AMF向终端发送第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示终端向接入网设备获取会话上下文;若否,在终端建立会话的过程中,AMF向M个接入网设备发送终端组的会话上下文和终端组的标识,M个接入网设备为终端组中的终端接入的接入网设备,M个接入网设备包括终端接入的接入网设备,M为大于0的整数。第二方面提供的方法,在终端组中的首个终端建立会话的过程中,AMF将终端组的会话上下文发送给M个接入网设备,在其他终端注册过程中,AMF可以向其他终端发送第一指示信息,指示终端向接入的接入网设备获取终端组的会话上下文,后续在PDU会话建立流程或SR流程中,终端只需要与接入的接入网设备交互即可获取到终端组的会话上下文,从而避免重复的信令交互,极大地减少繁琐的信令交互,有效节省网络资源。In a second aspect, a communication method is provided, including: during the registration process of the terminal, the AMF determines whether the session context of the terminal group to which the terminal belongs is delivered to the access network device, and the access network device is the access network device for the terminal access. network equipment, the services of the terminals in the terminal group have the same QoS requirements; if so, the AMF sends the first indication information to the terminal, and the first indication information is used to instruct the terminal to obtain the session context from the access network equipment; During the session, the AMF sends the session context of the terminal group and the identifier of the terminal group to M access network devices, where the M access network devices are the access network devices accessed by the terminals in the terminal group, and the M access network devices are the access network devices accessed by the terminals in the terminal group. The equipment includes the access network equipment accessed by the terminal, and M is an integer greater than 0. In the method provided by the second aspect, during the process of establishing a session for the first terminal in the terminal group, the AMF sends the session context of the terminal group to M access network devices. During the registration process of other terminals, the AMF can send the message to other terminals. The first indication information instructs the terminal to obtain the session context of the terminal group from the accessed access network device. In the subsequent PDU session establishment process or SR process, the terminal only needs to interact with the accessed access network device to obtain the terminal. The session context of the group is used, thereby avoiding repeated signaling interactions, greatly reducing tedious signaling interactions, and effectively saving network resources.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一指示信息具体用于指示终端在会话建立过程中或服务请求过程中向接入网设备获取会话上下文。该种可能的实现方式,终端可以在多种场景下向接入网设备获取会话上下文,加大了该方法的应用范围。In a possible implementation manner, the first indication information is specifically used to instruct the terminal to obtain the session context from the access network device during the session establishment process or the service request process. In this possible implementation manner, the terminal can obtain the session context from the access network device in various scenarios, which enlarges the application scope of the method.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在终端建立会话的过程中,该方法还包括:AMF从终端接收第二消息,第二消息用于请求为终端建立会话;AMF确定终端为终端组中的首个请求建立会话的终端;AMF向SMF发送第三消息,第三消息中携带终端组的标识,第三消息用于请求终端组的会话上下文;AMF从SMF接收终端组的会话上下文。该种可能的实现方式,提供了一种获取终端组的会话上下文的方法。In a possible implementation manner, in the process of establishing the session by the terminal, the method further includes: the AMF receives a second message from the terminal, where the second message is used to request to establish a session for the terminal; the AMF determines that the terminal is the first in the terminal group A terminal requesting to establish a session; AMF sends a third message to SMF, the third message carries the identifier of the terminal group, and the third message is used to request the session context of the terminal group; AMF receives the session context of the terminal group from the SMF. This possible implementation provides a method for acquiring the session context of the terminal group.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在终端建立会话的过程中,该方法还包括:AMF从SMF接收IP地址集,IP地址集用于终端组中的终端的IP地址的分配。In a possible implementation manner, during the process of establishing a session by the terminal, the method further includes: the AMF receives an IP address set from the SMF, where the IP address set is used for allocating IP addresses of the terminals in the terminal group.
在一种可能的实现方式中,若M=1,在终端建立会话的过程中,该方法还包括:AMF向接入网设备发送IP地址集。该种可能的实现方式,由于终端组中的终端接入一个接入网设备,因此,AMF可以向该接入网设备发送IP地址集,从而由该接入网设备对终端组中的终端的IP地址进行统一的管理。In a possible implementation manner, if M=1, in the process of establishing a session by the terminal, the method further includes: the AMF sends an IP address set to the access network device. In this possible implementation manner, since a terminal in a terminal group accesses an access network device, the AMF can send an IP address set to the access network device, so that the access network device can communicate with the terminals in the terminal group. Unified management of IP addresses.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在终端组中的第三终端停止工作的情况下,该方法还包括:AMF接收来自于M个接入网设备的第六指示信息;AMF通过SMF向为M个接入网设备服务的UPF发送第四指示信息和第六指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示UPF第三终端离开第一会话,第六指示信息用于指示第三终端的IP地址;其中,终端组中的终端共用第一会话中的一个QoS流,或者,终端组中的接入同一个接入网设备的终端共用第一会话中的一个QoS流。该种可能的实现方式,在终端停止工作的情况下,可以告知UPF,以便UPF回收IP地址。In a possible implementation manner, in the case that the third terminal in the terminal group stops working, the method further includes: the AMF receives the sixth indication information from the M access network devices; The UPF served by each access network device sends fourth indication information and sixth indication information, the fourth indication information is used to instruct the UPF third terminal to leave the first session, and the sixth indication information is used to indicate the IP address of the third terminal; wherein , the terminals in the terminal group share one QoS flow in the first session, or the terminals in the terminal group accessing the same access network device share one QoS flow in the first session. In this possible implementation manner, when the terminal stops working, the UPF can be notified, so that the UPF can reclaim the IP address.
在一种可能的实现方式中,M>1,在终端建立会话的过程中,该方法还包括:AMF从终端接入的接入网设备接收IP地址请求,IP地址请求用于为终端请求IP地址;AMF根据IP地址集为终端分配IP地址;AMF向终端接入的接入网设备发送为终端分配的 IP地址。该种可能的实现方式,由于终端组中的终端接入多个接入网设备,因此,可以由AMF进行统一的IP地址分配,以便对终端组中的终端的IP地址进行统一的管理。In a possible implementation manner, M>1, in the process of establishing a session by the terminal, the method further includes: the AMF receives an IP address request from an access network device accessed by the terminal, and the IP address request is used to request an IP address for the terminal address; the AMF assigns an IP address to the terminal according to the IP address set; the AMF sends the IP address assigned to the terminal to the access network device accessed by the terminal. In this possible implementation manner, since the terminals in the terminal group access multiple access network devices, the AMF can perform uniform IP address allocation, so as to uniformly manage the IP addresses of the terminals in the terminal group.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在终端组中的第三终端停止工作的情况下,该方法还包括:AMF回收第三终端的IP地址;AMF通过SMF向为第三终端接入的接入网设备服务的UPF发送第四指示信息和第六指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示UPF第三终端离开第一会话,第六指示信息用于指示第三终端的IP地址;其中,终端组中的终端共用第一会话中的一个QoS流,或者,终端组中的接入同一个接入网设备的终端共用第一会话中的一个QoS流。该种可能的实现方式,在终端停止工作的情况下,可以回收IP地址,以便后续分配给其他终端,并可以告知UPF,以便UPF执行相同的操作,保证网络中各个网元的信息一致性。In a possible implementation manner, when the third terminal in the terminal group stops working, the method further includes: the AMF reclaims the IP address of the third terminal; The UPF served by the network device sends fourth indication information and sixth indication information, the fourth indication information is used to instruct the UPF third terminal to leave the first session, and the sixth indication information is used to indicate the IP address of the third terminal; wherein, the terminal group The terminals in the terminal share one QoS flow in the first session, or the terminals in the terminal group that access the same access network device share one QoS flow in the first session. In this possible implementation, when the terminal stops working, the IP address can be recovered for subsequent allocation to other terminals, and the UPF can be notified so that the UPF can perform the same operation to ensure the information consistency of each network element in the network.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:AMF根据第三终端的上下文获取第三终端接入的接入网设备的标识和第三终端的标识;AMF向第三终端接入的接入网设备发送第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示第三终端停止工作。该种可能的实现方式,可以使得接入网设备确定停止工作的终端,从而释放相应的连接,释放网络资源。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the AMF obtains, according to the context of the third terminal, the identity of the access network device accessed by the third terminal and the identity of the third terminal; The network access device sends third indication information, where the third indication information is used to instruct the third terminal to stop working. In this possible implementation manner, the access network device can determine the terminal that stops working, thereby releasing the corresponding connection and releasing network resources.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在终端建立会话的过程中,该方法还包括:AMF从M个接入网设备接收M个接入网设备的隧道信息;AMF向SMF发送M个接入网设备的隧道信息。由于其他终端不需要再执行会话建立或SR的流程,因此,为了保证UPF获取M个接入网设备的隧道信息,在终端组中的首个终端建立会话的过程中,AMF向SMF发送M个接入网设备的隧道信息,SMF可以让UPF提前获取M个接入网设备的隧道信息。In a possible implementation manner, in the process of establishing the session by the terminal, the method further includes: the AMF receives the tunnel information of the M access network devices from the M access network devices; the AMF sends the M access network devices to the SMF Tunnel information for the device. Since other terminals do not need to perform the session establishment or SR process, in order to ensure that the UPF obtains the tunnel information of M access network devices, during the session establishment process of the first terminal in the terminal group, the AMF sends M Tunnel information of access network devices, SMF can let UPF obtain tunnel information of M access network devices in advance.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在终端建立会话的过程中,该方法还包括:AMF向终端发送终端的会话上下文。In a possible implementation manner, in the process of establishing the session by the terminal, the method further includes: the AMF sends the session context of the terminal to the terminal.
在一种可能的实现方式中,AMF根据终端的标识确定终端所属的终端组,包括:AMF根据终端的标识从UDM获取终端的签约信息,签约信息中包括终端所属的终端组的信息。该种可能的实现方式,提供了一种确定终端组的方法。In a possible implementation manner, the AMF determines the terminal group to which the terminal belongs according to the identification of the terminal, including: the AMF obtains the subscription information of the terminal from the UDM according to the identification of the terminal, and the subscription information includes information of the terminal group to which the terminal belongs. This possible implementation provides a method for determining a terminal group.
第三方面,提供了一种通信方法,包括:终端在注册过程中从AMF接收第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示终端向接入的接入网设备获取会话上下文,终端属于终端组,终端组中的终端的业务具有相同的QoS需求;终端根据第一指示信息向接入网设备发送第一消息,第一消息中包括终端组的标识;终端从接入网设备接收第一响应,第一响应中携带终端组的会话上下文。第三方面提供的方法,在终端组中的首个终端建立会话的过程中,AMF将终端组的会话上下文发送给M个接入网设备,在其他终端注册过程中,AMF可以向其他终端发送第一指示信息,指示终端向接入的接入网设备获取终端组的会话上下文,后续在PDU会话建立流程或SR流程中,终端只需要与接入的接入网设备交互即可获取到终端组的会话上下文,从而避免重复的信令交互,极大地减少繁琐的信令交互,有效节省网络资源。In a third aspect, a communication method is provided, including: a terminal receiving first indication information from an AMF during a registration process, where the first indication information is used to instruct the terminal to obtain a session context from an accessed access network device, and the terminal belongs to a terminal group , the services of the terminals in the terminal group have the same QoS requirements; the terminal sends a first message to the access network device according to the first indication information, and the first message includes the identifier of the terminal group; the terminal receives the first response from the access network device , the first response carries the session context of the terminal group. In the method provided by the third aspect, in the process of establishing a session for the first terminal in the terminal group, the AMF sends the session context of the terminal group to M access network devices, and during the registration process of other terminals, the AMF can send the The first indication information instructs the terminal to obtain the session context of the terminal group from the accessed access network device. In the subsequent PDU session establishment process or SR process, the terminal only needs to interact with the accessed access network device to obtain the terminal. The session context of the group is used, thereby avoiding repeated signaling interactions, greatly reducing tedious signaling interactions, and effectively saving network resources.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一指示信息具体用于指示终端在会话建立过程中或服务请求过程中向接入网设备获取会话上下文,终端根据第一指示信息向接入网设备发送第一消息,包括:终端根据第一指示信息,在会话建立过程中或服务请求过程中向接入网设备发送第一消息。该种可能的实现方式,终端可以在多种场景下向接入网 设备发送第一消息,加大了该方法的应用范围。In a possible implementation manner, the first indication information is specifically used to instruct the terminal to obtain the session context from the access network device during the session establishment process or the service request process, and the terminal sends the first indication information to the access network device according to the first indication information. A message includes: according to the first indication information, the terminal sends a first message to an access network device during a session establishment process or a service request process. In this possible implementation manner, the terminal can send the first message to the access network device in various scenarios, which increases the application scope of the method.
第四方面,提供了一种通信方法,包括:SMF从AMF接收第二终端的第三消息,第二终端为终端组中的首个请求建立会话的终端,终端组中的终端的业务具有相同的QoS需求,第三消息中携带终端组的标识,第三消息用于请求终端组的会话上下文;SMF根据终端组的标识创建终端组的会话上下文;SMF向AMF发送终端组的会话上下文。第四方面提供了一种使得AMF获取终端组的会话上下文的方法。In a fourth aspect, a communication method is provided, including: the SMF receives a third message of a second terminal from the AMF, the second terminal is the first terminal in the terminal group that requests to establish a session, and the services of the terminals in the terminal group have the same The third message carries the identifier of the terminal group, and the third message is used to request the session context of the terminal group; SMF creates the session context of the terminal group according to the identifier of the terminal group; SMF sends the session context of the terminal group to the AMF. A fourth aspect provides a method for enabling an AMF to acquire a session context of a terminal group.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:SMF为终端组分配IP地址集,并向AMF发送IP地址集,IP地址集用于终端组中的终端的IP地址的分配。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the SMF allocates an IP address set to the terminal group, and sends the IP address set to the AMF, where the IP address set is used for allocating IP addresses of the terminals in the terminal group.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在SMF向AMF发送终端组的会话上下文之前,该方法还包括:SMF向PCF发送第五指示信息,第五指示信息用于指示PCF为终端组制定对应的PCC规则;SMF从PCF接收PCF为终端组制定的PCC规则;SMF根据PCC规则生成终端组的会话上下文中的QoS规则。该种可能的实现方式,提供了一种获取PCC规则并生成终端组的会话上下文中的QoS规则的方法。In a possible implementation manner, before the SMF sends the session context of the terminal group to the AMF, the method further includes: the SMF sends fifth indication information to the PCF, where the fifth indication information is used to instruct the PCF to formulate a corresponding PCC for the terminal group Rules; the SMF receives the PCC rules formulated by the PCF for the terminal group from the PCF; the SMF generates the QoS rules in the session context of the terminal group according to the PCC rules. This possible implementation provides a method for acquiring PCC rules and generating QoS rules in the session context of the terminal group.
在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:SMF根据PCC规则生成为第二终端接入的接入网设备服务的UPF对应的PDR;SMF向UPF发送IP地址集和UPF对应的PDR。该种可能的实现方式,可以使得UPF获取QoS的执行规则和IP地址集合,以便UPF进行后续的IP地址的绑定和QoS的执行规则的调整。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the SMF generates a PDR corresponding to the UPF serving the access network device accessed by the second terminal according to the PCC rule; and the SMF sends the IP address set and the PDR corresponding to the UPF to the UPF. In this possible implementation manner, the UPF can obtain the QoS enforcement rule and the IP address set, so that the UPF can perform subsequent IP address binding and QoS enforcement rule adjustment.
第五方面,提供了一种通信方法,包括:UPF从SMF接收IP地址集,IP地址集用于终端组中的终端的IP地址的分配,终端组中的终端的业务具有相同的QoS需求,终端组中的终端共用第一会话中的一个QoS流,或者,终端组中的接入同一个接入网设备的终端共用第一会话中的一个QoS流;UPF接收第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示UPF第一终端加入第一会话,UPF将第一终端与IP地址集中的IP地址绑定;或者,UPF接收第六指示信息和第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示UPF第三终端离开第一会话,第六指示信息用于指示第三终端的IP地址,UPF根据第四指示信息和第六指示信息回收第三终端的IP地址。第五方面提供的方法,UPF可以根据加入第一会话的终端和离开第一会话的终端进行IP地址的绑定和回收,从而及时的进行IP地址的分配和回收,保证终端的数据的正确传输。A fifth aspect provides a communication method, comprising: the UPF receives an IP address set from the SMF, the IP address set is used for allocating IP addresses of terminals in a terminal group, and the services of the terminals in the terminal group have the same QoS requirements, The terminals in the terminal group share one QoS flow in the first session, or the terminals in the terminal group that access the same access network device share one QoS flow in the first session; the UPF receives the second indication information, and the second The indication information is used to instruct the UPF first terminal to join the first session, and the UPF binds the first terminal to the IP address in the IP address set; or, the UPF receives the sixth indication information and the fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate The UPF third terminal leaves the first session, the sixth indication information is used to indicate the IP address of the third terminal, and the UPF recycles the IP address of the third terminal according to the fourth indication information and the sixth indication information. According to the method provided in the fifth aspect, the UPF can perform IP address binding and recovery according to the terminal joining the first session and the terminal leaving the first session, so as to timely allocate and recover the IP address and ensure the correct transmission of data of the terminal .
在一种可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:UPF从SMF接收UPF对应的PDR,PDR根据为终端组制定的PCC规则生成;UPF根据第二指示信息或第四指示信息调整PDR。该种可能的实现方式,可以使得UPF获取QoS的执行规则,并根据当前的加入第一会话的终端个数进行QoS的执行规则的调整,以保证QoS流的正常传输。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the UPF receives a PDR corresponding to the UPF from the SMF, and the PDR is generated according to the PCC rule formulated for the terminal group; and the UPF adjusts the PDR according to the second indication information or the fourth indication information. In this possible implementation manner, the UPF can obtain the QoS execution rules, and adjust the QoS execution rules according to the current number of terminals joining the first session, so as to ensure the normal transmission of the QoS flow.
第六方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:通信单元和处理单元;处理单元,用于通过通信单元从AMF接收终端组的会话上下文和所述终端组的标识,终端组中的终端的业务具有相同的QoS需求;处理单元,还用于通过通信单元从终端组中的第一终端接收第一消息,第一消息中包括终端组的标识,通信装置为第一终端接入的通信装置;处理单元,还用于根据第一消息通过通信单元向第一终端发送第一响应,第一响应中携带终端组的会话上下文。In a sixth aspect, a communication device is provided, comprising: a communication unit and a processing unit; a processing unit for receiving, through the communication unit, a session context of a terminal group and an identifier of the terminal group from an AMF, and services of the terminals in the terminal group have the same QoS requirements; the processing unit is further configured to receive a first message from a first terminal in the terminal group through the communication unit, where the first message includes an identifier of the terminal group, and the communication device is a communication device accessed by the first terminal; The processing unit is further configured to send a first response to the first terminal through the communication unit according to the first message, where the first response carries the session context of the terminal group.
在一种可能的实现方式中,处理单元,具体用于:在终端组中的第二终端建立会话的过程中,通过通信单元从AMF接收终端组的会话上下文,第二终端为终端组中 的首个请求建立会话的终端。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is specifically configured to: in the process of establishing a session by the second terminal in the terminal group, receive the session context of the terminal group from the AMF through the communication unit, and the second terminal is the terminal group in the terminal group. The first terminal to request a session.
在一种可能的实现方式中,处理单元,具体用于:在第一终端的会话建立过程中或服务请求过程中,通过通信单元从第一终端接收第一消息。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is specifically configured to: receive the first message from the first terminal through the communication unit during the session establishment process or the service request process of the first terminal.
在一种可能的实现方式中,终端组中的终端接入M个通信装置,M=1,处理单元,还用于通过通信单元从AMF接收IP地址集;处理单元,还用于根据IP地址集为第一终端分配IP地址;处理单元,还用于通过通信单元向第一终端发送为第一终端分配的IP地址。In a possible implementation manner, the terminals in the terminal group access M communication devices, M=1, the processing unit is further configured to receive an IP address set from the AMF through the communication unit; the processing unit is further configured to receive an IP address set according to the IP address The set assigns the IP address to the first terminal; the processing unit is further configured to send the IP address assigned to the first terminal to the first terminal through the communication unit.
在一种可能的实现方式中,终端组中的终端接入M个通信装置,M>1,M为整数,通信装置为M个通信装置中的一个,处理单元,还用于通过通信单元向AMF发送IP地址请求,IP地址请求用于为第一终端请求IP地址;处理单元,还用于通过通信单元从AMF接收AMF为第一终端分配的IP地址;处理单元,还用于通过通信单元向第一终端发送AMF为第一终端分配的IP地址。In a possible implementation manner, the terminals in the terminal group access M communication apparatuses, where M>1, M is an integer, and the communication apparatus is one of the M communication apparatuses. The AMF sends an IP address request, and the IP address request is used to request an IP address for the first terminal; the processing unit is further configured to receive the IP address allocated by the AMF for the first terminal from the AMF through the communication unit; the processing unit is also used to pass the communication unit The IP address assigned by the AMF to the first terminal is sent to the first terminal.
在一种可能的实现方式中,处理单元,还用于通过通信单元向为通信装置提供服务的UPF发送第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示UPF第一终端加入第一会话,终端组中的终端共用第一会话中的一个QoS流,或者,终端组中的接入通信装置的终端共用第一会话中的一个QoS流。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to send second indication information to the UPF that provides services for the communication device through the communication unit, where the second indication information is used to instruct the UPF first terminal to join the first session, the terminal group The terminals in the terminal share one QoS flow in the first session, or the terminals in the terminal group accessing the communication apparatus share one QoS flow in the first session.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在终端组中的、接入通信装置的第三终端停止工作的情况下,处理单元,还用于通过通信单元向为通信装置提供服务的UPF发送第六指示信息和第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示UPF第三终端离开第一会话,第六指示信息用于指示第三终端的IP地址,终端组中的终端共用第一会话中的一个QoS流,或者,终端组中的接入通信装置的终端共用第一会话中的一个QoS流。In a possible implementation manner, when the third terminal in the terminal group that accesses the communication device stops working, the processing unit is further configured to send a sixth indication to the UPF serving the communication device through the communication unit information and fourth indication information, the fourth indication information is used to instruct the UPF third terminal to leave the first session, the sixth indication information is used to indicate the IP address of the third terminal, and the terminals in the terminal group share one QoS in the first session flow, or the terminals in the terminal group accessing the communication apparatus share one QoS flow in the first session.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在终端组中的、接入通信装置的第三终端停止工作的情况下,处理单元,还用于通过通信单元从AMF接收第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示第三终端停止工作;处理单元,还用于释放与第三终端之间的连接。In a possible implementation manner, when the third terminal in the terminal group that accesses the communication apparatus stops working, the processing unit is further configured to receive third indication information from the AMF through the communication unit, the third indication information It is used to instruct the third terminal to stop working; the processing unit is also used to release the connection with the third terminal.
在一种可能的实现方式中,处理单元,还用于根据终端组中的当前接入通信装置的终端个数和终端组的会话上下文,对QoS流的QoS配置文件进行调整。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to adjust the QoS profile of the QoS flow according to the number of terminals currently accessing the communication apparatus in the terminal group and the session context of the terminal group.
第七方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:通信单元和处理单元;在终端的注册过程中,处理单元,用于判断终端所属的终端组的会话上下文是否下发给接入网设备,接入网设备为终端接入的接入网设备,终端组中的终端的业务具有相同的QoS需求;若是,通信单元,用于向终端发送第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示终端向接入网设备获取会话上下文;若否,在终端建立会话的过程中,通信单元,用于向M个接入网设备发送终端组的会话上下文和所述终端组的标识,M个接入网设备为终端组中的终端接入的接入网设备,M个接入网设备包括终端接入的接入网设备,M为大于0的整数。In a seventh aspect, a communication device is provided, comprising: a communication unit and a processing unit; during the registration process of the terminal, the processing unit is used to determine whether the session context of the terminal group to which the terminal belongs is delivered to the access network device, and then receives the The network access device is the access network device accessed by the terminal, and the services of the terminals in the terminal group have the same QoS requirements; if so, the communication unit is used to send the first indication information to the terminal, and the first indication information is used to instruct the terminal to send to the terminal. The access network device obtains the session context; if not, in the process of establishing the session by the terminal, the communication unit is configured to send the session context of the terminal group and the identifier of the terminal group to the M access network devices, and the M access network devices The device is an access network device accessed by a terminal in the terminal group, the M access network devices include the access network device accessed by the terminal, and M is an integer greater than 0.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一指示信息具体用于指示终端在会话建立过程中或服务请求过程中向接入网设备获取会话上下文。In a possible implementation manner, the first indication information is specifically used to instruct the terminal to obtain the session context from the access network device during the session establishment process or the service request process.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在终端建立会话的过程中,通信单元,还用于从终端接收第二消息,第二消息用于请求为终端建立会话;处理单元,还用于确定终端为终端组中的首个请求建立会话的终端;通信单元,还用于向SMF发送第三消息,第三消 息中携带终端组的标识,第三消息用于请求终端组的会话上下文;通信单元,还用于从SMF接收终端组的会话上下文。In a possible implementation manner, during the process of establishing a session by the terminal, the communication unit is further configured to receive a second message from the terminal, where the second message is used to request to establish a session for the terminal; the processing unit is further configured to determine whether the terminal is the first terminal in the terminal group that requests to establish a session; the communication unit is further configured to send a third message to the SMF, where the third message carries the identifier of the terminal group, and the third message is used to request the session context of the terminal group; the communication unit, Also used to receive the session context of the endpoint group from the SMF.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在终端建立会话的过程中,通信单元,还用于从SMF接收IP地址集,IP地址集用于终端组中的终端的IP地址的分配。In a possible implementation manner, during the process of establishing a session by the terminal, the communication unit is further configured to receive an IP address set from the SMF, where the IP address set is used for allocating IP addresses of the terminals in the terminal group.
在一种可能的实现方式中,若M=1,在终端建立会话的过程中,通信单元,还用于向接入网设备发送IP地址集。In a possible implementation manner, if M=1, in the process of establishing a session of the terminal, the communication unit is further configured to send the IP address set to the access network device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在终端组中的第三终端停止工作的情况下,通信单元,还用于接收来自于M个接入网设备的第六指示信息;通信单元,还用于通过SMF向为M个接入网设备服务的UPF发送第四指示信息和第六指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示UPF第三终端离开第一会话,第六指示信息用于指示第三终端的IP地址;其中,终端组中的终端共用第一会话中的一个QoS流,或者,终端组中的接入同一个接入网设备的终端共用第一会话中的一个QoS流。In a possible implementation manner, when the third terminal in the terminal group stops working, the communication unit is further configured to receive the sixth indication information from the M access network devices; the communication unit is further configured to receive the sixth indication information from the M access network devices; Send fourth indication information and sixth indication information to the UPF serving M access network devices through SMF, the fourth indication information is used to instruct the UPF third terminal to leave the first session, and the sixth indication information is used to instruct the third terminal where the terminals in the terminal group share one QoS flow in the first session, or the terminals in the terminal group accessing the same access network device share one QoS flow in the first session.
在一种可能的实现方式中,M>1,在终端建立会话的过程中,通信单元,还用于从终端接入的接入网设备接收IP地址请求,IP地址请求用于为终端请求IP地址;处理单元,还用于根据IP地址集为终端分配IP地址;通信单元,还用于向终端接入的接入网设备发送为终端分配的IP地址。In a possible implementation manner, M>1, in the process of establishing a session for the terminal, the communication unit is further configured to receive an IP address request from an access network device accessed by the terminal, and the IP address request is used to request an IP address for the terminal address; the processing unit is further configured to assign an IP address to the terminal according to the IP address set; the communication unit is further configured to send the IP address assigned to the terminal to the access network device accessed by the terminal.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在终端组中的第三终端停止工作的情况下,处理单元,还用于回收第三终端的IP地址;通信单元,还用于通过SMF向为第三终端接入的接入网设备服务的UPF发送第四指示信息和第六指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示UPF第三终端离开第一会话,第六指示信息用于指示第三终端的IP地址;其中,终端组中的终端共用第一会话中的一个QoS流,或者,终端组中的接入同一个接入网设备的终端共用第一会话中的一个QoS流。In a possible implementation manner, when the third terminal in the terminal group stops working, the processing unit is further configured to reclaim the IP address of the third terminal; the communication unit is further configured to send messages to the third terminal through SMF The UPF served by the accessed access network device sends fourth indication information and sixth indication information, the fourth indication information is used to instruct the UPF third terminal to leave the first session, and the sixth indication information is used to indicate the IP address of the third terminal wherein, the terminals in the terminal group share one QoS flow in the first session, or the terminals in the terminal group accessing the same access network device share one QoS flow in the first session.
在一种可能的实现方式中,处理单元,还用于根据第三终端的上下文获取第三终端接入的接入网设备的标识和第三终端的标识;通信单元,还用于向第三终端接入的接入网设备发送第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示第三终端停止工作。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to acquire the identity of the access network device accessed by the third terminal and the identity of the third terminal according to the context of the third terminal; the communication unit is further configured to send the third terminal to the third terminal. The access network device accessed by the terminal sends third indication information, where the third indication information is used to instruct the third terminal to stop working.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在终端建立会话的过程中,通信单元,还用于从M个接入网设备接收M个接入网设备的隧道信息;通信单元,还用于向SMF发送M个接入网设备的隧道信息。In a possible implementation manner, in the process of establishing a session by the terminal, the communication unit is further configured to receive tunnel information of the M access network devices from the M access network devices; the communication unit is further configured to send the SMF to the SMF Tunnel information of M access network devices.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在终端建立会话的过程中,通信单元,还用于向终端发送终端的会话上下文。In a possible implementation manner, during the process of establishing the session by the terminal, the communication unit is further configured to send the session context of the terminal to the terminal.
在一种可能的实现方式中,处理单元,具体用于:根据终端的标识通过通信单元从UDM获取终端的签约信息,签约信息中包括终端所属的终端组的信息。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is specifically configured to: obtain subscription information of the terminal from the UDM through the communication unit according to the identifier of the terminal, where the subscription information includes information of the terminal group to which the terminal belongs.
第八方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:通信单元和处理单元;处理单元,用于通过通信单元在注册过程中从AMF接收第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示通信装置向接入的接入网设备获取会话上下文,通信装置属于终端组,终端组中的通信装置的业务具有相同的QoS需求;处理单元,还用于根据第一指示信息通过通信单元向接入网设备发送第一消息,第一消息中包括终端组的标识;处理单元,还用于通过通信单元从接入网设备接收第一响应,第一响应中携带终端组的会话上下文。In an eighth aspect, a communication device is provided, comprising: a communication unit and a processing unit; the processing unit is configured to receive first indication information from the AMF during a registration process through the communication unit, where the first indication information is used to instruct the communication device to send The incoming access network device obtains the session context, the communication device belongs to the terminal group, and the services of the communication devices in the terminal group have the same QoS requirements; the processing unit is further configured to send the communication unit to the access network device according to the first indication information The first message includes the identifier of the terminal group; the processing unit is further configured to receive a first response from the access network device through the communication unit, where the first response carries the session context of the terminal group.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一指示信息具体用于指示通信装置在会话建立过程 中或服务请求过程中向接入网设备获取会话上下文,处理单元,具体用于:根据第一指示信息,在会话建立过程中或服务请求过程中通过通信单元向接入网设备发送第一消息。In a possible implementation manner, the first indication information is specifically used to instruct the communication apparatus to obtain the session context from the access network device during the session establishment process or the service request process, and the processing unit is specifically configured to: according to the first indication information , in the session establishment process or the service request process, the first message is sent to the access network device through the communication unit.
第九方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:通信单元和处理单元;通信单元,用于从AMF接收第二终端的第三消息,第二终端为终端组中的首个请求建立会话的终端,终端组中的终端的业务具有相同的QoS需求,第三消息中携带终端组的标识,第三消息用于请求终端组的会话上下文;处理单元,用于根据终端组的标识创建终端组的会话上下文;通信单元,还用于向AMF发送终端组的会话上下文。In a ninth aspect, a communication device is provided, comprising: a communication unit and a processing unit; the communication unit is configured to receive a third message of a second terminal from the AMF, where the second terminal is the first terminal in the terminal group that requests to establish a session , the services of the terminals in the terminal group have the same QoS requirements, the third message carries the identifier of the terminal group, and the third message is used to request the session context of the terminal group; the processing unit is used to create a terminal group according to the identifier of the terminal group. Session context; the communication unit is also used to send the session context of the terminal group to the AMF.
在一种可能的实现方式中,处理单元,还用于为终端组分配IP地址集,并通过通信单元向AMF发送IP地址集,IP地址集用于终端组中的终端的IP地址的分配。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to allocate an IP address set to the terminal group, and send the IP address set to the AMF through the communication unit, where the IP address set is used for allocating IP addresses of the terminals in the terminal group.
在一种可能的实现方式中,通信单元,还用于向PCF发送第五指示信息,第五指示信息用于指示PCF为终端组制定对应的PCC规则;通信单元,还用于从PCF接收PCF为终端组制定的PCC规则;处理单元,还用于根据PCC规则生成终端组的会话上下文中的QoS规则。In a possible implementation manner, the communication unit is further configured to send fifth indication information to the PCF, where the fifth indication information is used to instruct the PCF to formulate corresponding PCC rules for the terminal group; the communication unit is further configured to receive the PCF from the PCF The PCC rule formulated for the terminal group; the processing unit is further configured to generate the QoS rule in the session context of the terminal group according to the PCC rule.
在一种可能的实现方式中,处理单元,还用于根据PCC规则生成为第二终端接入的接入网设备服务的UPF对应的PDR;通信单元,还用于向UPF发送IP地址集和UPF对应的PDR。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to generate a PDR corresponding to the UPF serving the access network device accessed by the second terminal according to the PCC rule; the communication unit is further configured to send the IP address set and the UPF to the UPF. PDR corresponding to UPF.
第十方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:通信单元和处理单元;处理单元,用于通过通信单元从SMF接收IP地址集,IP地址集用于终端组中的终端的IP地址的分配,终端组中的终端的业务具有相同的QoS需求,终端组中的终端共用第一会话中的一个QoS流,或者,终端组中的接入同一个接入网设备的终端共用第一会话中的一个QoS流;处理单元,还用于通过通信单元接收第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示通信装置第一终端加入第一会话,处理单元,还用于将第一终端与IP地址集中的IP地址绑定;或者,处理单元,还用于通过通信单元接收第六指示信息和第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示通信装置第三终端离开第一会话,第六指示信息用于指示第三终端的IP地址,处理单元,还用于根据第四指示信息和第六指示信息回收第三终端的IP地址。In a tenth aspect, a communication device is provided, comprising: a communication unit and a processing unit; the processing unit is configured to receive an IP address set from the SMF through the communication unit, where the IP address set is used for allocating IP addresses of terminals in a terminal group, The services of the terminals in the terminal group have the same QoS requirements, and the terminals in the terminal group share one QoS flow in the first session, or the terminals in the terminal group that access the same access network device share the same QoS flow in the first session. A QoS flow; the processing unit is further configured to receive second indication information through the communication unit, the second indication information is used to instruct the first terminal of the communication device to join the first session, and the processing unit is further configured to aggregate the first terminal and the IP address or, the processing unit is further configured to receive sixth indication information and fourth indication information through the communication unit, the fourth indication information is used to instruct the third terminal of the communication device to leave the first session, and the sixth indication information is used for for indicating the IP address of the third terminal, the processing unit is further configured to recover the IP address of the third terminal according to the fourth indication information and the sixth indication information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,处理单元,还用于通过通信单元从SMF接收通信装置对应的PDR,PDR根据为终端组制定的PCC规则生成;处理单元,还用于根据第二指示信息或第四指示信息调整PDR。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to receive a PDR corresponding to the communication device from the SMF through the communication unit, and the PDR is generated according to the PCC rule formulated for the terminal group; the processing unit is further configured to receive the PDR according to the second indication information or The fourth indication information adjusts the PDR.
第十一方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:处理器。处理器与存储器连接,存储器用于存储计算机执行指令,处理器执行存储器存储的计算机执行指令,从而实现第一方面至第五方面中的任一方面提供的任意一种方法。示例性的,存储器和处理器可以集成在一起,也可以为独立的器件。若为后者,存储器可以位于通信装置内,也可以位于通信装置外。In an eleventh aspect, a communication apparatus is provided, comprising: a processor. The processor is connected to the memory, the memory is used for storing computer-executed instructions, and the processor executes the computer-executed instructions stored in the memory, thereby implementing any one of the methods provided in any one of the first to fifth aspects. Exemplarily, the memory and the processor may be integrated together, or may be independent devices. In the latter case, the memory may be located in the communication device or outside the communication device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,处理器包括逻辑电路,还包括输入接口和输出接口中的至少一个。示例性的,输出接口用于执行相应方法中的发送的动作,输入接口用于执行相应方法中的接收的动作。In a possible implementation, the processor includes a logic circuit, and also includes at least one of an input interface and an output interface. Exemplarily, the output interface is used for performing the sending action in the corresponding method, and the input interface is used for performing the receiving action in the corresponding method.
在一种可能的实现方式中,通信装置还包括通信接口和通信总线,处理器、存储 器和通信接口通过通信总线连接。通信接口用于执行相应方法中的收发的动作。通信接口也可以称为收发器。可选的,通信接口包括发送器和接收器中的至少一种,该情况下,发送器用于执行相应方法中的发送的动作,接收器用于执行相应方法中的接收的动作。In a possible implementation manner, the communication device further includes a communication interface and a communication bus, and the processor, the memory and the communication interface are connected through the communication bus. The communication interface is used to perform the actions of transceiving in the corresponding method. The communication interface may also be referred to as a transceiver. Optionally, the communication interface includes at least one of a transmitter and a receiver. In this case, the transmitter is configured to perform the sending action in the corresponding method, and the receiver is configured to perform the receiving action in the corresponding method.
在一种可能的实现方式中,通信装置以芯片的产品形态存在。In a possible implementation manner, the communication device exists in the form of a chip product.
第十二方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括处理器和接口电路,接口电路用于接收来自通信装置之外的其它通信装置的信号并传输至处理器或将来自处理器的信号发送给通信装置之外的其它通信装置,处理器通过逻辑电路或执行代码指令用于实现第一方面至第五方面中的任一方面提供的任意一种方法。A twelfth aspect provides a communication device, comprising a processor and an interface circuit, the interface circuit is configured to receive signals from other communication devices other than the communication device and transmit to the processor or send signals from the processor to the communication device For other communication devices other than the device, the processor is used to implement any one of the methods provided in any one of the first to fifth aspects by using a logic circuit or executing code instructions.
第十三方面,提供了一种通信系统,包括第六方面、第七方面、第八方面、第九方面和第十方面中的任意一个或多个方面提供的通信装置。A thirteenth aspect provides a communication system, including the communication apparatus provided by any one or more of the sixth aspect, the seventh aspect, the eighth aspect, the ninth aspect, and the tenth aspect.
第十四方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,包括计算机执行指令,当计算机执行指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行第一方面至第五方面中的任一方面提供的任意一种方法。A fourteenth aspect provides a computer-readable storage medium, comprising computer-executable instructions, which, when the computer-executable instructions are run on a computer, cause the computer to execute any one of the first to fifth aspects provided method.
第十五方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,包括计算机执行指令,当计算机执行指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行第一方面至第五方面中的任一方面提供的任意一种方法。A fifteenth aspect provides a computer program product, comprising computer-executable instructions, which, when the computer-executable instructions are run on a computer, cause the computer to perform any one of the methods provided in any one of the first to fifth aspects.
第六方面至第十五方面中的任一种实现方式所带来的技术效果可参见第一方面至第五方面中对应实现方式所带来的技术效果,此处不再赘述。For the technical effects brought by any one of the implementation manners of the sixth aspect to the fifteenth aspect, reference may be made to the technical effects brought about by the corresponding implementation manners in the first aspect to the fifth aspect, which will not be repeated here.
需要说明的是,在方案不矛盾的前提下,上述各个方面中的方案均可以结合。It should be noted that, on the premise that the solutions are not contradictory, the solutions in the above aspects can be combined.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1为一种5G网络的架构图;Figure 1 is an architecture diagram of a 5G network;
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程图;2 is a flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信方法的流程图;3 is a flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图4为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信方法的流程图;4 is a flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图5为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信方法的流程图;FIG. 5 is a flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图6为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信方法的流程图;6 is a flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图7为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信方法的流程图;FIG. 7 is a flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图8为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信方法的流程图;FIG. 8 is a flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信方法的流程图;FIG. 9 is a flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信方法的流程图;10 is a flowchart of another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图11为本申请实施例提供的再一种通信方法的流程图;11 is a flowchart of still another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图12为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的组成示意图;FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of the composition of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图13为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的硬件结构示意图;FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图14为本申请实施例提供的又一种通信装置的硬件结构示意图。FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of another communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
在本申请的描述中,除非另有说明,“/”表示或的意思,例如,A/B可以表示A或B;本文中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。 在本申请的描述中,除非另有说明,“至少一个”是指一个或多个,“多个”是指两个或多于两个。In the description of this application, unless otherwise specified, "/" means or means, for example, A/B can mean A or B; "and/or" in this text is only a relationship to describe the related objects, Indicates that three relationships can exist, for example, A and/or B, can represent: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone. In the description of this application, unless stated otherwise, "at least one" means one or more, and "plurality" means two or more.
另外,为了便于清楚描述本申请实施例的技术方案,在本申请的实施例中,采用了“第一”、“第二”等字样对功能和作用基本相同的相同项或相似项进行区分。本领域技术人员可以理解“第一”、“第二”等字样并不对数量和执行次序进行限定,并且“第一”、“第二”等字样也并不限定一定不同。In addition, in order to clearly describe the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, in the embodiments of the present application, words such as "first" and "second" are used to distinguish the same or similar items with basically the same function and effect. Those skilled in the art can understand that the words "first", "second" and the like do not limit the quantity and execution order, and the words "first", "second" and the like are not necessarily different.
其中,本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于第四代(4th Generation,4G)系统、基于4G系统演进的各种系统、5G系统、基于5G系统演进的各种系统中。其中,4G系统也可以称为演进分组系统(evolved packet system,EPS)。4G系统的核心网可以称为演进分组核心网(evolved packet core,EPC),接入网可以称为长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)。5G系统的核心网可以称为5GC(5G core),接入网可以称为新无线(new radio,NR)。The technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application may be applied to a fourth generation (4th Generation, 4G) system, various systems based on 4G system evolution, 5G systems, and various systems based on 5G system evolution. The 4G system may also be called an evolved packet system (EPS). The core network of the 4G system may be called an evolved packet core (EPC), and the access network may be called long term evolution (LTE). The core network of the 5G system can be called 5GC (5G core), and the access network can be called new radio (NR).
图1示例性的示出了5G系统的一种网络架构示意图。在该示意图中,5G系统可以包括:鉴权服务器功能(authentication server function,AUSF)网元、接入和移动管理功能(core access and mobility management function,AMF)网元、数据网络(data network,DN)、统一数据管理(unified data management,UDM)网元、策略控制功能(policy control function,PCF)网元、(无线)接入网((radio)access network,(R)AN)网元、用户面功能(user plane function,UPF)网元、终端(terminal)、应用功能(application function,AF)网元、会话管理功能(session management function,SMF)网元,网络开放功能(network exposure function,NEF)网元,网络功能库功能(network function repository function,NRF)网元,统一数据库(unified data repository,UDR)网元。FIG. 1 exemplarily shows a schematic diagram of a network architecture of a 5G system. In this schematic diagram, the 5G system may include: an authentication server function (AUSF) network element, an access and mobility management function (core access and mobility management function, AMF) network element, a data network (DN, DN) ), unified data management (UDM) network element, policy control function (PCF) network element, (radio) access network ((R)AN) network element, user User plane function (UPF) network element, terminal (terminal), application function (AF) network element, session management function (session management function, SMF) network element, network exposure function (network exposure function, NEF) ) network element, network function repository function (NRF) network element, unified database (unified data repository, UDR) network element.
需要说明的是,图1中的(R)AN网元、AMF网元、SMF网元、AUSF网元、UDM网元、UPF网元和PCF网元等仅是一个名字,名字对网元本身不构成限定。在5G网络以及未来其它的网络中,这些网元所对应的实体或设备也可以是其他的名字,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。例如,UDM网元还有可能被替换为用户归属服务器(home subscriber server,HSS)或者用户签约数据库(user subscription database,USD)或者数据库网元,等等,在此进行统一说明,以下不再赘述。It should be noted that the (R)AN network element, AMF network element, SMF network element, AUSF network element, UDM network element, UPF network element and PCF network element in Figure 1 are only a name, and the name is related to the network element itself. does not constitute a limitation. In the 5G network and other future networks, the entities or devices corresponding to these network elements may also have other names, which are not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application. For example, the UDM network element may also be replaced with a user home server (home subscriber server, HSS) or user subscription database (user subscription database, USD) or database network element, etc., which are described here uniformly, and will not be repeated below. .
为方便描述,在下文中将(R)AN网元、AMF网元、SMF网元、UDM网元、UPF网元、PCF网元等分别通过RAN、AMF、SMF、UDM、UPF、PCF等指代。For convenience of description, in the following, (R)AN network element, AMF network element, SMF network element, UDM network element, UPF network element, PCF network element, etc. are referred to by RAN, AMF, SMF, UDM, UPF, PCF, etc. respectively. .
图1中的终端、RAN、UPF和DN一般被称为用户面网元,用户的数据流量可以通过终端和DN之间建立的PDU会话进行传输,传输会经过RAN和UPF这两个网元。其中,用户面用于业务数据承载。图1中的其他网元则被称为控制面网元,主要负责认证和鉴权、注册管理、会话管理、移动性管理以及策略控制等功能,从而实现用户层流量可靠稳定的传输。其中,控制面用于承载信令消息。The terminal, RAN, UPF, and DN in Figure 1 are generally referred to as user plane network elements. User data traffic can be transmitted through the PDU session established between the terminal and the DN, and the transmission will pass through the two network elements, RAN and UPF. Among them, the user plane is used for service data bearing. The other network elements in Figure 1 are called control plane network elements, and are mainly responsible for functions such as authentication and authentication, registration management, session management, mobility management, and policy control, so as to achieve reliable and stable transmission of user layer traffic. The control plane is used to carry signaling messages.
图1中展示了网元之间的交互关系以及对应的接口,例如终端和AMF之间可以通过N1接口进行交互,交互消息称为N1消息(Message)。部分接口采用服务化接口的方式实现。Figure 1 shows the interaction relationship between network elements and corresponding interfaces. For example, the terminal and the AMF can interact through the N1 interface, and the interaction message is called an N1 message (Message). Some interfaces are implemented in the form of service interfaces.
图1中部分网元的功能如下:The functions of some network elements in Figure 1 are as follows:
PCF,具备向控制面网元提供策略规则等功能。PCF has functions such as providing policy rules to network elements on the control plane.
UDM,具备管理用户的签约数据,生成用户的认证信息等功能。UDM has functions such as managing user contract data and generating user authentication information.
AF,可以是应用服务器,其可以属于运营商,也可以属于第三方。主要支持与第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)核心网交互来提供服务,例如影响数据路由决策,策略控制功能或者向网络侧提供第三方的一些服务。AF, which may be an application server, may belong to an operator or a third party. It mainly supports interaction with the 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) core network to provide services, such as influencing data routing decisions, policy control functions, or providing some third-party services to the network side.
RAN,由多个接入网设备(也可以称为RAN节点或网络设备)组成的网络,实现无线物理层功能、资源调度和无线资源管理、无线接入控制以及移动性管理功能,服务质量管理,数据压缩和加密等功能。接入网设备通过用户面接口N3和UPF相连,用于传送终端的数据。接入网设备通过控制面接口N2和AMF建立控制面信令连接,用于实现无线接入承载控制等功能。RAN, a network composed of multiple access network devices (also known as RAN nodes or network devices), implements wireless physical layer functions, resource scheduling and wireless resource management, wireless access control and mobility management functions, and quality of service management. , data compression and encryption functions. The access network equipment is connected to the UPF through the user plane interface N3, and is used to transmit data of the terminal. The access network equipment establishes a control plane signaling connection with the AMF through the control plane interface N2 to implement functions such as radio access bearer control.
AMF,主要负责信令处理部分,例如,终端的注册管理、终端的连接管理、终端的可达性管理、终端的接入授权和接入鉴权、终端的安全功能,终端的移动性管理,网络切片(network slice)选择,SMF选择,终端的附着与去附着等功能。AMF作为N1和N2信令连接的锚点并为SMF提供N1/N2接口会话管理(session management,SM)消息的路由;维护和管理终端的状态信息。AMF网元为终端中的会话提供服务的情况下,会为该会话提供控制面的存储资源,以存储会话标识、与会话标识关联的SMF的标识等。AMF is mainly responsible for the signaling processing part, such as terminal registration management, terminal connection management, terminal reachability management, terminal access authorization and access authentication, terminal security function, terminal mobility management, Network slice selection, SMF selection, terminal attachment and detachment functions. The AMF acts as the anchor point for the N1 and N2 signaling connections and provides the N1/N2 interface session management (session management, SM) message routing for the SMF; maintains and manages the state information of the terminal. When the AMF network element provides services for a session in the terminal, it provides storage resources of the control plane for the session to store the session ID, the ID of the SMF associated with the session ID, and the like.
SMF,主要负责终端会话管理的所有控制面功能,包括UPF的选择、控制以及重定向,互联网协议(internet protocol,IP)地址分配及管理,会话的QoS管理,从PCF获取策略与计费控制(policy and charging control,PCC)策略,承载的建立、修改以及释放等。SMF还作为非接入层(non-access stratum,NAS)消息中SM部分的终结点。SMF is mainly responsible for all control plane functions of terminal session management, including UPF selection, control and redirection, Internet Protocol (IP) address allocation and management, session QoS management, and obtaining policy and charging control from PCF ( policy and charging control, PCC) policy, bearer establishment, modification and release, etc. The SMF also acts as a termination point for the SM part of a non-access stratum (NAS) message.
UPF,作为PDU会话连接的锚定点,负责对终端的数据报文过滤、数据传输/转发(例如,对接入网设备和DN之间交互的数据进行转发)、速率控制、生成计费信息、用户面QoS处理、上行传输认证、传输等级验证、下行数据包缓存及下行数据通知触发等。UPF还可以作为多宿主(multi-homed)PDU会话的分支点。UPF中为终端提供服务的传输资源和调度功能由SMF进行管理控制。UPF, as the anchor point of the PDU session connection, is responsible for the terminal data packet filtering, data transmission/forwarding (for example, forwarding the data exchanged between the access network device and the DN), rate control, generation of charging information, User plane QoS processing, uplink transmission authentication, transmission level verification, downlink data packet buffering and downlink data notification triggering, etc. The UPF can also act as a branch point for a multi-homed PDU session. The transmission resources and scheduling functions that serve the terminal in the UPF are managed and controlled by the SMF.
终端可以是无线终端也可以是有线终端。无线终端可以是指向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备,具有无线连接功能的手持式设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其他处理设备。终端与接入网设备之间采用某种空口技术(如NR技术或LTE技术)相互通信。终端与终端之间也可以采用某种空口技术(如NR技术或LTE技术)相互通信。无线终端可以经接入网设备与一个或多个核心网设备通信,如与AMF、SMF等进行通信。无线终端可以是移动终端,如移动电话(或称为“蜂窝”电话)、智能电话、卫星无线设备、无线调制解调器卡以及具有移动终端的计算机,例如,可以是膝上型、便携式、袖珍式、手持式、计算机内置的或者车载的移动装置,它们与接入网设备交换语音和/或数据。示例性的,无线终端可以为个人通信业务(personal communication service,PCS)电话、无绳电话、会话发起协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)话机、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)眼镜、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)眼 镜、机器类型通信终端等设备。在车联网通信中,车辆上装载的通信设备是一种终端,路边单元(road side unit,RSU)也可以作为一种终端。无人机上装载的通信设备,也可以看做是一种终端。无线终端也可以称为用户设备(user equipment,UE)、订户单元(subscriber unit)、订户站(subscriber station),移动站(mobile station)、移动台(mobile)、远程站(remote station)、接入点(access point)、接入终端(access terminal)、用户终端(user terminal)、用户代理(user agent)等。The terminal may be a wireless terminal or a wired terminal. A wireless terminal may be a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to a user, a handheld device with wireless connectivity, or other processing device connected to a wireless modem. A certain air interface technology (such as NR technology or LTE technology) is used between the terminal and the access network device to communicate with each other. A certain air interface technology (such as NR technology or LTE technology) can also be used between terminals to communicate with each other. A wireless terminal may communicate with one or more core network devices via access network devices, such as with AMF, SMF, and the like. The wireless terminal may be a mobile terminal, such as a mobile phone (or "cellular" phone), smart phone, satellite wireless device, wireless modem card, and computer with a mobile terminal, for example, may be laptop, portable, pocket, Handheld, computer built-in or vehicle mounted mobile devices that exchange voice and/or data with access network equipment. Exemplarily, the wireless terminal may be a personal communication service (PCS) phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital Assistant (personal digital assistant, PDA), virtual reality (virtual reality, VR) glasses, augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) glasses, machine type communication terminals and other equipment. In the Internet of Vehicles communication, the communication equipment loaded on the vehicle is a kind of terminal, and the roadside unit (RSU) can also be used as a kind of terminal. The communication equipment loaded on the UAV can also be regarded as a kind of terminal. A wireless terminal may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), subscriber unit (subscriber unit), subscriber station (subscriber station), mobile station (mobile station), mobile station (mobile), remote station (remote station), receiver Access point, access terminal, user terminal, user agent, etc.
可以理解的是,除图1所示功能网元之外,5G网络的网络架构还可以包括其他功能网元。例如,在AF网元和PCF网元之间还可以包括网络开放功能(network exposure function,NEF)网元,可以用于交互网络内部和外部信息等。在本申请实施例中,网元也可以称为实体或设备等。It can be understood that, in addition to the functional network elements shown in FIG. 1 , the network architecture of the 5G network may also include other functional network elements. For example, a network exposure function (NEF) network element may also be included between the AF network element and the PCF network element, which may be used to exchange internal and external information of the network. In this embodiment of the present application, a network element may also be referred to as an entity or a device or the like.
在5G网络中,本申请实施例中的会话可以为PDU会话,PDU会话是终端和DN之间的连接,用于提供PDU连接服务。其中,PDU会话类型可以是IP连接、以太网连接或者非结构数据连接等。终端可以发起建立一个或多个PDU会话,来连接到相同的DN或者不同的DN。In a 5G network, the session in this embodiment of the present application may be a PDU session, which is a connection between a terminal and a DN, and is used to provide a PDU connection service. The PDU session type may be an IP connection, an Ethernet connection, or an unstructured data connection. A terminal can initiate the establishment of one or more PDU sessions to connect to the same DN or to different DNs.
QoS流是PDU会话中最精细的QoS区分粒度,一个QoS流标识(QoS flow identity,QFI)用于标识一个QoS流。一个PDU会话可以包括多个QoS流,每个QoS流可以承载多个业务。A QoS flow is the most refined QoS differentiation granularity in a PDU session, and a QoS flow identity (QFI) is used to identify a QoS flow. A PDU session can include multiple QoS flows, and each QoS flow can carry multiple services.
需要说明的是,针对同一个QoS流,在不同的设备有对应的QoS的执行规则。其中,在接入网设备上,该QoS的执行规则可以称为QoS配置文件(QoS profile),在终端上,该QoS的执行规则可以称为QoS规则(QoS rule),在UPF上,该QoS的执行规则可以称为包检测规则(packet detection rule,PDR)。It should be noted that, for the same QoS flow, different devices have corresponding QoS enforcement rules. Among them, on the access network device, the QoS execution rule can be called QoS profile (QoS profile), on the terminal, the QoS execution rule can be called QoS rule (QoS rule), on UPF, the QoS rule The execution rules can be called packet detection rules (packet detection rules, PDR).
本申请可以应用于物联网中,具体可以应用于终端个数较多,终端的QoS需求相同或相似,终端位置比较固定的场景中,例如,视频监控场景、传感器网络场景、可穿戴设备(智能手环、智能手表、智能眼镜等)等。This application can be applied to the Internet of Things, specifically in scenarios where there are a large number of terminals, the QoS requirements of the terminals are the same or similar, and the location of the terminals is relatively fixed, for example, video surveillance scenarios, sensor network scenarios, wearable devices (smart wristbands, smart watches, smart glasses, etc.)
现有技术中,在视频监控场景下,当应用商需要安装一系列摄像头时,安装好的每个摄像头独立的执行现有3GPP协议规定的PDU会话建立流程(具体流程可以参见第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)技术规范(technical specification,TS)23.502条款(Clause)4.3.2),实现PDU会话的建立,造成繁杂、重复、低效的信令交互,从而造成资源浪费。类似的,在传感器网络之下,每个传感器独立的执行PDU会话建立流程实现PDU会话的建立,因此,也存在同样的问题。In the prior art, in a video surveillance scenario, when an application provider needs to install a series of cameras, each installed camera independently executes the PDU session establishment process specified by the existing 3GPP protocol (for the specific process, please refer to the third-generation partners. Plan (3rd generation partnership project, 3GPP) technical specification (technical specification, TS) 23.502 clause (Clause) 4.3.2), to achieve the establishment of PDU session, resulting in complicated, repetitive, inefficient signaling interaction, resulting in waste of resources. Similarly, under the sensor network, each sensor independently executes the PDU session establishment process to realize the establishment of the PDU session. Therefore, the same problem also exists.
另外,在视频监控场景下,在多个摄像头从空闲态(即CM-IDLE态)恢复到连接态(即CM-CONNECTED态)时,每个摄像头需要逐个进行服务请求(service request,SR)流程进入连接态,同时激活现有的PDU会话从而实现对应的上行数据传输(具体流程可以参见3GPP TS 23.502 Clause 4.2.3),对核心网造成了巨大的信令负担,导致网络资源的低效利用。类似的,在传感器网络之下,位置固定且具有相同QoS需求的传感器需要进入空闲态节约能耗,当多个传感器从空闲态转入连接态时,每个传感器都需要执行SR流程进入连接态,同时激活现有的PDU会话从而实现对应的上行数据传输,因此,也存在同样的问题。In addition, in the video surveillance scenario, when multiple cameras are restored from the idle state (ie CM-IDLE state) to the connected state (ie CM-CONNECTED state), each camera needs to perform a service request (SR) process one by one. Enter the connection state, and activate the existing PDU session at the same time to realize the corresponding uplink data transmission (for the specific process, please refer to 3GPP TS 23.502 Clause 4.2.3), which causes a huge signaling burden on the core network, resulting in inefficient use of network resources . Similarly, under the sensor network, sensors with fixed locations and the same QoS requirements need to enter the idle state to save energy. When multiple sensors transition from the idle state to the connected state, each sensor needs to execute the SR process to enter the connected state. , and activate the existing PDU session at the same time to realize the corresponding uplink data transmission. Therefore, the same problem also exists.
现有技术中,相互之间位置固定、QoS需求一致的终端(例如,摄像头或传感器) 的相关性完全无法得到应用,造成繁杂、重复、低效的信令交互,从而造成资源浪费。为了解决该问题,本申请提出了一种通信方法,网络侧能够对终端之间的这些相关性加以利用,为该类终端创建一个“整体/群组”的PDU会话,即以群组为单位进行PDU会话建立或者PDU会话激活,不需要每个终端进行PDU会话建立流程或者SR流程,精简PDU会话建立流程或SR流程,确保终端能够快速完成PDU会话建立或者PDU会话激活,有效避免复杂的信令交互,提升网络资源利用率,加快网络连接建立与状态转换,避免信令资源浪费。以下对本申请实施例提供的方法做具体阐述。In the prior art, the correlation between terminals (eg, cameras or sensors) with fixed locations and consistent QoS requirements cannot be applied at all, resulting in complicated, repetitive, and inefficient signaling interaction, thereby resulting in waste of resources. In order to solve this problem, the present application proposes a communication method. The network side can make use of these correlations between terminals to create a "whole/group" PDU session for such terminals, that is, in a group unit. To establish a PDU session or activate a PDU session, it is not necessary for each terminal to perform a PDU session establishment process or an SR process, simplifying the PDU session establishment process or SR process to ensure that the terminal can quickly complete the PDU session establishment or PDU session activation, effectively avoiding complex information. Enable interaction, improve network resource utilization, speed up network connection establishment and state transition, and avoid waste of signaling resources. The methods provided in the embodiments of the present application are described in detail below.
本申请涉及到的网元包括移动管理网元、会话管理网元、用户面网元、数据管理网元以及策略控制网元,下文中以移动管理网元、会话管理网元、用户面网元、数据管理网元以及策略控制网元分别为5G网络中的AMF、SMF、UPF、UDM和PCF为例,对本申请提供的方法作示例性说明。需要说明的是,下文中的AMF、SMF、UPF、UDM和PCF可以分别替换为移动管理网元、会话管理网元、用户面网元、数据管理网元以及策略控制网元。在本申请应用于4G系统或其他的通信系统(例如,未来演进的通信系统)中时,将本申请涉及到的网元替换为相应通信系统中具有相同或相似功能的网元进行理解即可。The network elements involved in this application include mobility management network elements, session management network elements, user plane network elements, data management network elements, and policy control network elements. , the data management network element and the policy control network element are respectively AMF, SMF, UPF, UDM and PCF in the 5G network as an example to illustrate the method provided in this application. It should be noted that AMF, SMF, UPF, UDM and PCF in the following may be replaced by mobility management network elements, session management network elements, user plane network elements, data management network elements and policy control network elements, respectively. When this application is applied to a 4G system or other communication systems (for example, a communication system that will evolve in the future), it is sufficient to replace the network elements involved in this application with network elements with the same or similar functions in the corresponding communication system for understanding. .
参见图2,该方法包括:Referring to Figure 2, the method includes:
201、在终端(记为终端A)的注册过程中,AMF判断终端A所属的终端组的会话上下文是否下发给接入网设备(记为接入网设备A),接入网设备A为终端A接入的接入网设备。201. During the registration process of the terminal (denoted as terminal A), the AMF determines whether the session context of the terminal group to which terminal A belongs is delivered to the access network device (denoted as access network device A), and the access network device A is: Access network equipment accessed by terminal A.
其中,终端组中的终端的业务具有相同或相似的QoS需求。示例性的,终端组可以为一组具有相同的QoS需求的摄像头或一组具有相同的QoS需求的传感器。The services of the terminals in the terminal group have the same or similar QoS requirements. Exemplarily, the terminal group may be a group of cameras with the same QoS requirement or a group of sensors with the same QoS requirement.
QoS需求可以通过多个QoS参数表征,例如,时延,丢包率等。相似的QoS需求可以是指部分QoS参数相同的两种QoS需求,例如,时延和/或丢包率相同的两种QoS需求。相似的QoS需求还可以是指同一QoS参数之间的差距不超过一个阈值的两种QoS需求,该阈值可以为预设的或预定义的或协议规定的或网元之间协商确定的,本申请不作限制。例如,时延之间的差距不超过2毫秒(ms)的两种QoS需求可以认为是相似的QoS需求,或者,时延之间的差距不超过2ms和/或丢包率之间的差距不超过0.1%的两种QoS需求可以认为是相似的QoS需求。QoS requirements can be characterized by multiple QoS parameters, such as delay, packet loss rate, etc. Similar QoS requirements may refer to two QoS requirements with the same partial QoS parameters, for example, two QoS requirements with the same delay and/or packet loss rate. Similar QoS requirements can also refer to two QoS requirements whose difference between the same QoS parameters does not exceed a threshold. Applications are not limited. For example, two QoS requirements that differ by no more than 2 milliseconds (ms) between delays can be considered similar QoS requirements, or, where the difference between Two QoS requirements exceeding 0.1% can be considered as similar QoS requirements.
终端A可以为终端组中的任意一个终端。Terminal A may be any terminal in the terminal group.
步骤201在具体实现时,终端A可以向AMF发送注册请求(registration request),注册请求中可以包含终端A的标识,AMF根据终端A的标识确定终端A所属的终端组,继而判断终端组的会话上下文是否下发给接入网设备A。When step 201 is specifically implemented, terminal A can send a registration request (registration request) to the AMF, and the registration request can include the identity of terminal A, and AMF determines the terminal group to which terminal A belongs according to the identity of terminal A, and then judges the session of the terminal group. Whether the context is delivered to access network device A.
可选的,AMF根据终端A的标识确定终端A所属的终端组,包括:AMF根据终端A的标识从UDM获取终端A的签约信息,签约信息中包括终端A所属的终端组的信息。Optionally, the AMF determines the terminal group to which the terminal A belongs according to the identifier of the terminal A, including: the AMF obtains the subscription information of the terminal A from the UDM according to the identifier of the terminal A, and the subscription information includes information of the terminal group to which the terminal A belongs.
其中,UDM中的终端组的信息可以从AF获取,AF可以通过能力开放信息将终端组的信息发送给UDM。UDM中的终端组的信息也可以是运营商配置的,本申请不作限制。其中,终端组的信息可以指示哪些终端属于一个终端组以及终端组的标识。进一步的,终端组的信息还可以包括每个终端的位置信息,以便确定这些终端在哪个 接入网设备的覆盖范围之内。Wherein, the information of the terminal group in the UDM can be obtained from the AF, and the AF can send the information of the terminal group to the UDM through the capability opening information. The information of the terminal group in the UDM may also be configured by the operator, which is not limited in this application. The information of the terminal group may indicate which terminals belong to a terminal group and the identifier of the terminal group. Further, the information of the terminal group may also include location information of each terminal, so as to determine which access network equipment these terminals are covered by.
若步骤201的判断结果为是,说明终端A不是终端组中首个请求建立会话的终端,此时,执行步骤202。若步骤201的判断结果为否,说明终端A为终端组中首个请求建立会话的终端,此时,执行步骤203。If the judgment result in step 201 is yes, it means that the terminal A is not the first terminal in the terminal group to request the establishment of the session. In this case, step 202 is executed. If the judgment result in step 201 is no, it means that terminal A is the first terminal in the terminal group that requests to establish a session, and in this case, step 203 is executed.
202、AMF向终端A发送第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示终端A向接入网设备A获取会话上下文(或者说第一指示信息用于指示终端A向接入的接入网设备获取会话上下文)。相应的,终端A在注册过程中从AMF接收第一指示信息。202. The AMF sends first indication information to terminal A, where the first indication information is used to instruct terminal A to obtain a session context from access network device A (or the first indication information is used to instruct terminal A to access the access network device A). get the session context). Correspondingly, the terminal A receives the first indication information from the AMF during the registration process.
其中,第一指示信息可以携带在注册响应(或者说注册接受(registration accept)消息)中。The first indication information may be carried in a registration response (or a registration accept (registration accept) message).
203、在终端A建立会话的过程中,AMF向M个接入网设备发送终端组的会话上下文和终端组的标识中的一个或多个。相应的,M个接入网设备中的每个接入网设备从AMF接收终端组的会话上下文和终端组的标识中的一个或多个。203. During the process of establishing a session by terminal A, the AMF sends one or more of the session context of the terminal group and the identifier of the terminal group to the M access network devices. Correspondingly, each of the M access network devices receives one or more of the session context of the terminal group and the identifier of the terminal group from the AMF.
其中,M个接入网设备为终端组中的终端接入的接入网设备,M个接入网设备包括终端A接入的接入网设备A,M为大于0的整数。The M access network devices are access network devices accessed by terminals in the terminal group, the M access network devices include access network device A accessed by terminal A, and M is an integer greater than 0.
其中,AMF可以根据终端组的信息确定每个终端的位置信息,根据每个终端的位置信息,确定终端组对应的M个接入网设备。The AMF may determine the location information of each terminal according to the information of the terminal group, and determine the M access network devices corresponding to the terminal group according to the location information of each terminal.
其中,终端组的标识用于标识一个终端组。终端组的会话上下文可以包括QoS rule,PDU会话标识,切片相关信息(例如,数据网络名称(data network name,DNN)或网络切片选择标识(single-network slice selection assistance information,S-NSSAI))等。其中,QoS rule包括QFI、速率、时延等。The identifier of the terminal group is used to identify a terminal group. The session context of the terminal group may include QoS rules, PDU session identifiers, slice related information (for example, data network name (DNN) or network slice selection identifier (single-network slice selection assistance information, S-NSSAI)), etc. . Among them, QoS rules include QFI, rate, delay, etc.
终端组中的部分或全部终端可以共用一个会话(记为第一会话)中的一个QoS流。Some or all of the terminals in the terminal group may share one QoS flow in one session (referred to as the first session).
第一种情况下,终端组中的全部终端共用第一会话中的第一QoS流。该情况下,终端组的会话上下文是指终端组中的全部终端的会话上下文的公共部分,该情况下,终端组中的全部终端对应相同的QFI。此时,终端组中的每个终端将数据映射到与第一QFI(即第一QoS流的QFI)对应的数据无线承载(data radio bearer,DRB)中,该终端接入的接入网设备接收到之后,将该DRB的与第一QoS流对应的数据映射到第一QFI对应的第一QoS流上。In the first case, all terminals in the terminal group share the first QoS flow in the first session. In this case, the session context of the terminal group refers to the common part of the session contexts of all the terminals in the terminal group, and in this case, all the terminals in the terminal group correspond to the same QFI. At this time, each terminal in the terminal group maps data to a data radio bearer (DRB) corresponding to the first QFI (that is, the QFI of the first QoS flow), and the access network equipment accessed by the terminal After receiving, the data of the DRB corresponding to the first QoS flow is mapped to the first QoS flow corresponding to the first QFI.
示例性的,若终端组中共有12个终端,12个终端接入了3个接入网设备(记为接入网设备1至接入网设备3),12个终端共用第一会话中的第一QoS流,此时终端组的会话上下文中的QFI为第一QoS流的QFI。Exemplarily, if there are 12 terminals in the terminal group, 12 terminals access 3 access network devices (referred to as access network device 1 to access network device 3), and the 12 terminals share the For the first QoS flow, the QFI in the session context of the terminal group is the QFI of the first QoS flow.
第二种情况下,终端组中的接入同一个接入网设备的终端共用第一会话中的一个QoS流。终端组的会话上下文与接入网设备对应,不同的接入网设备对应的会话上下文可以相同,也可以不同。一个接入网设备对应的终端组的会话上下文是指接入同一个接入网设备的终端的会话上下文的公共部分。该情况下,接入同一个接入网设备的终端对应相同的QFI,接入不同接入网设备的终端对应相同的QFI或不同的QFI。此时,接入同一个接入网设备的每个终端将数据映射到与该接入网设备对应的QoS流的QFI对应的DRB中,该接入网设备接收到之后,将该DRB的与该接入网设备对应的QoS流对应的数据映射到该接入网设备对应的QoS流的QFI对应的QoS流上。In the second case, the terminals in the terminal group accessing the same access network device share one QoS flow in the first session. The session context of the terminal group corresponds to the access network device, and the session contexts corresponding to different access network devices may be the same or different. The session context of the terminal group corresponding to one access network device refers to the common part of the session context of the terminals accessing the same access network device. In this case, terminals accessing the same access network device correspond to the same QFI, and terminals accessing different access network devices correspond to the same QFI or different QFIs. At this time, each terminal accessing the same access network device maps data to the DRB corresponding to the QFI of the QoS flow corresponding to the access network device. The data corresponding to the QoS flow corresponding to the access network device is mapped to the QoS flow corresponding to the QFI of the QoS flow corresponding to the access network device.
示例性的,若终端组中共有12个终端,12个终端接入了3个接入网设备(记为 接入网设备1至接入网设备3),接入接入网设备1的终端共用第一会话中的QoS流1,接入接入网设备2的终端共用第一会话中的QoS流2,接入接入网设备3的终端共用第一会话中的QoS流3,此时,参见表1,接入网设备1对应的终端组的会话上下文中的QFI为QoS流1的QFI,接入网设备2对应的终端组的会话上下文中的QFI为QoS流2的QFI,接入网设备3对应的终端组的会话上下文中的QFI为QoS流3的QFI。Exemplarily, if there are 12 terminals in the terminal group, and the 12 terminals access 3 access network devices (referred to as access network device 1 to access network device 3), the terminals that access access network device 1 The QoS flow 1 in the first session is shared, the terminals accessing the access network device 2 share the QoS flow 2 in the first session, and the terminals accessing the access network device 3 share the QoS flow 3 in the first session. , referring to Table 1, the QFI in the session context of the terminal group corresponding to the access network device 1 is the QFI of the QoS flow 1, and the QFI in the session context of the terminal group corresponding to the access network device 2 is the QFI of the QoS flow 2. The QFI in the session context of the terminal group corresponding to the network access device 3 is the QFI of the QoS flow 3 .
表1Table 1
接入网设备Access network equipment 终端组的会话上下文中的QFIQFI in the session context of a terminal group
接入网设备1Access network equipment 1 QoS流1的QFIQFI for QoS Flow 1
接入网设备2Access network equipment 2 QoS流2的QFIQFI for QoS Flow 2
接入网设备3 Access network equipment 3 QoS流3的QFIQFI for QoS Flow 3
现有技术中所有的终端都独立的进行PDU会话建立流程或者SR流程,忽略了终端的会话之间的关联,造成信令浪费。本申请实施例提供的方法,在终端组中的首个终端建立会话的过程中,AMF将终端组的会话上下文发送给M个接入网设备,在其他终端注册过程中,AMF可以向其他终端发送第一指示信息,指示终端向接入的接入网设备获取终端组的会话上下文,后续在PDU会话建立流程或SR流程中,终端只需要与接入的接入网设备交互即可获取到终端组的会话上下文,从而避免重复的信令交互,极大地减少繁琐的信令交互,有效节省网络资源。In the prior art, all terminals independently perform the PDU session establishment process or the SR process, ignoring the association between the sessions of the terminals, resulting in waste of signaling. In the method provided by this embodiment of the present application, in the process of establishing a session for the first terminal in the terminal group, the AMF sends the session context of the terminal group to M access network devices. Send the first indication information to instruct the terminal to obtain the session context of the terminal group from the accessed access network device. In the subsequent PDU session establishment process or SR process, the terminal only needs to interact with the accessed access network device to obtain the session context. The session context of the terminal group, thereby avoiding repeated signaling interactions, greatly reducing tedious signaling interactions, and effectively saving network resources.
以下分为情况1(终端A为终端组中首个请求建立会话的终端)和情况2(终端A不是终端组中首个请求建立会话的终端)对本申请提供的方法的进一步方案进行阐述。The following is divided into case 1 (terminal A is the first terminal in the terminal group to request to establish a session) and case 2 (terminal A is not the first terminal in the terminal group to request to establish a session) to describe further solutions of the method provided by the present application.
情况1、终端A为终端组中首个请求建立会话的终端。Case 1. Terminal A is the first terminal in the terminal group that requests to establish a session.
在情况1下,将终端A记为第二终端。In case 1, terminal A is denoted as the second terminal.
在情况1下,接入网设备从AMF接收终端组的会话上下文和终端组的标识中的一个或多个,包括:In case 1, the access network device receives one or more of the session context of the terminal group and the identity of the terminal group from the AMF, including:
1-1)在终端组中的第二终端建立会话的过程中,第二终端接入的接入网设备从AMF接收终端组的会话上下文和终端组的标识中的一个或多个。也就是说,在终端组中的首个终端建立会话的过程中,该终端接入的接入网设备从AMF接收终端组的会话上下文和终端组的标识中的一个或多个,以便后续过程中,其他接入该接入网设备的终端从该接入网设备处获取终端组的会话上下文。1-1) During the process of establishing a session by the second terminal in the terminal group, the access network device accessed by the second terminal receives one or more of the session context of the terminal group and the identifier of the terminal group from the AMF. That is to say, in the process of establishing a session for the first terminal in the terminal group, the access network device to which the terminal accesses receives one or more of the session context of the terminal group and the identifier of the terminal group from the AMF, so as to facilitate subsequent processes , other terminals accessing the access network device acquire the session context of the terminal group from the access network device.
在情况1下,可选的,AMF可以从SMF获取终端组的会话上下文,具体包括:In case 1, optionally, the AMF can obtain the session context of the terminal group from the SMF, including:
2-1)AMF从第二终端接收第二消息,第二消息用于请求为第二终端建立PDU会话。2-1) The AMF receives a second message from the second terminal, where the second message is used to request the establishment of a PDU session for the second terminal.
2-2)AMF确定第二终端为终端组中的首个请求建立PDU会话的终端。具体的,AMF可以通过确定终端组中是否有其他终端请求建立过PDU会话,若否,则确定第二终端为终端组中的首个请求建立PDU会话的终端。2-2) The AMF determines that the second terminal is the first terminal in the terminal group that requests to establish a PDU session. Specifically, the AMF may determine whether other terminals in the terminal group have requested to establish a PDU session, and if not, determine that the second terminal is the first terminal in the terminal group that requests to establish a PDU session.
2-3)AMF向SMF发送第三消息,第三消息中携带终端组的标识,第三消息用于请求终端组的会话上下文。相应的,SMF从AMF接收第二终端的第三消息。2-3) The AMF sends a third message to the SMF, where the third message carries the identifier of the terminal group, and the third message is used to request the session context of the terminal group. Correspondingly, the SMF receives the third message of the second terminal from the AMF.
2-4)SMF根据终端组的标识创建终端组的会话上下文。2-4) The SMF creates a session context of the terminal group according to the identifier of the terminal group.
2-5)SMF向AMF发送终端组的会话上下文。相应的,AMF从SMF接收终端组 的会话上下文。2-5) The SMF sends the session context of the terminal group to the AMF. Accordingly, the AMF receives the session context of the terminal group from the SMF.
在情况1下,可选的,终端组的会话上下文中的QoS rule可以根据PCC规则确定,因此,该方法还包括:In case 1, optionally, the QoS rule in the session context of the terminal group can be determined according to the PCC rule. Therefore, the method further includes:
3-1)SMF向PCF发送第五指示信息,第五指示信息用于指示所述PCF为终端组制定对应的PCC规则。其中,第五指示信息中可以包括终端组的标识。相应的,PCF从SMF接收第五指示信息。3-1) The SMF sends fifth indication information to the PCF, where the fifth indication information is used to instruct the PCF to formulate a corresponding PCC rule for the terminal group. Wherein, the fifth indication information may include the identifier of the terminal group. Correspondingly, the PCF receives the fifth indication information from the SMF.
3-2)PCF根据终端组的标识为终端组制定PCC规则,并向SMF发送PCC规则。相应的,SMF从PCF接收PCF为终端组制定的PCC规则。3-2) The PCF formulates a PCC rule for the terminal group according to the identifier of the terminal group, and sends the PCC rule to the SMF. Correspondingly, the SMF receives the PCC rules formulated by the PCF for the terminal group from the PCF.
3-3)SMF根据PCC规则生成终端组的会话上下文中的QoS rule。3-3) The SMF generates the QoS rule in the session context of the terminal group according to the PCC rule.
在情况1下,可选的,为了让第二终端获取到会话上下文,在第二终端建立会话的过程中,该方法还包括:In case 1, optionally, in order for the second terminal to acquire the session context, during the process of establishing the session by the second terminal, the method further includes:
4-1)AMF向第二终端发送第二终端的会话上下文。相应的,第二终端从AMF接收第二终端的会话上下文。其中,第二终端的会话上下文和终端组的会话上下文可以相同,或者,第二终端的会话上下文比终端组的会话上下文包含更多的信息。4-1) The AMF sends the session context of the second terminal to the second terminal. Correspondingly, the second terminal receives the session context of the second terminal from the AMF. The session context of the second terminal and the session context of the terminal group may be the same, or the session context of the second terminal contains more information than the session context of the terminal group.
其中,第二终端可以通过第二终端接入的接入网设备向第二终端发送第二终端的会话上下文。The second terminal may send the session context of the second terminal to the second terminal through the access network device accessed by the second terminal.
在情况1下,可选的,在第二终端建立会话的过程中,该方法还包括:In case 1, optionally, during the process of establishing the session by the second terminal, the method further includes:
5-1)M个接入网设备向AMF发送接入网设备的隧道信息。相应的,AMF从M个接入网设备接收接入网设备的隧道信息,并向SMF发送M个接入网设备的隧道信息。相应的,SMF从AMF接收M个接入网设备的隧道信息,并向为每个接入网设备服务的UPF发送该接入网设备的隧道信息,以便UPF向接入网设备发送数据包。5-1) The M access network devices send the tunnel information of the access network devices to the AMF. Correspondingly, the AMF receives the tunnel information of the access network devices from the M access network devices, and sends the tunnel information of the M access network devices to the SMF. Correspondingly, the SMF receives the tunnel information of the M access network devices from the AMF, and sends the tunnel information of the access network device to the UPF serving each access network device, so that the UPF sends data packets to the access network device.
在情况1下,在第二终端建立会话的过程中,该方法还包括:In case 1, during the process of establishing the session by the second terminal, the method further includes:
6-1)SMF为终端组分配IP地址集,并向AMF发送IP地址集,IP地址集用于终端组中的终端的IP地址的分配。相应的,AMF从SMF接收IP地址集。6-1) The SMF allocates an IP address set to the terminal group, and sends the IP address set to the AMF, and the IP address set is used for allocating IP addresses of the terminals in the terminal group. Accordingly, the AMF receives the set of IP addresses from the SMF.
在情况1下,可选的,该方法还包括:In case 1, optionally, the method further includes:
7-1)SMF根据PCC规则生成为第二终端接入的接入网设备服务的UPF对应的PDR。7-1) The SMF generates a PDR corresponding to the UPF serving the access network device accessed by the second terminal according to the PCC rule.
7-2)SMF向UPF发送IP地址集和对应的PDR。相应的,UPF从SMF接收IP地址集和对应的PDR。7-2) The SMF sends the IP address set and the corresponding PDR to the UPF. Accordingly, the UPF receives the IP address set and the corresponding PDR from the SMF.
其中,PDR中可以包括第二终端的IP地址,UPF根据PDR可以确定第二终端加入第一会话。在终端组中的首个终端建立会话的过程中,首个终端可以通过PDU会话建立接受消息获取会话上下文和为自己分配的IP地址。The PDR may include the IP address of the second terminal, and the UPF may determine that the second terminal joins the first session according to the PDR. During the session establishment process of the first terminal in the terminal group, the first terminal can obtain the session context and the IP address assigned to itself through the PDU session establishment accept message.
情况2、终端A不是终端组中首个请求建立会话的终端。Case 2: Terminal A is not the first terminal in the terminal group that requests to establish a session.
在情况2下,将终端A记为第一终端。In case 2, terminal A is denoted as the first terminal.
在情况2下,该方法还包括:In case 2, the method also includes:
8-1)第一终端根据第一指示信息向接入网设备发送第一消息,第一消息中包括终端组的标识。相应的,接入网设备从终端组中的第一终端接收第一消息。8-1) The first terminal sends a first message to the access network device according to the first indication information, where the first message includes the identifier of the terminal group. Correspondingly, the access network device receives the first message from the first terminal in the terminal group.
8-2)接入网设备根据第一消息向第一终端发送第一响应,第一响应中携带终端组的会话上下文。相应的,第一终端从接入网设备接收第一响应,根据第一响应确定终 端组的会话上下文。8-2) The access network device sends a first response to the first terminal according to the first message, where the first response carries the session context of the terminal group. Correspondingly, the first terminal receives the first response from the access network device, and determines the session context of the terminal group according to the first response.
在情况2下,可选的,第一指示信息具体用于指示终端在会话建立过程中或SR过程中向接入网设备获取终端组的会话上下文。该情况下,第一终端根据第一指示信息向接入网设备发送第一消息,包括:终端根据第一指示信息,在会话建立过程中或SR过程中向接入网设备发送第一消息。相应的,接入网设备从终端组中的第一终端接收第一消息,包括:在第一终端的会话建立过程中或SR过程中,接入网设备从终端组中的第一终端接收第一消息。In case 2, optionally, the first indication information is specifically used to instruct the terminal to obtain the session context of the terminal group from the access network device during the session establishment process or the SR process. In this case, sending the first message to the access network device by the first terminal according to the first indication information includes: according to the first indication information, the terminal sends the first message to the access network device during the session establishment process or the SR process. Correspondingly, the access network device receiving the first message from the first terminal in the terminal group includes: during the session establishment process or the SR process of the first terminal, the access network device receives the first message from the first terminal in the terminal group. a message.
其中,第一消息和第一响应均可以为无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)消息。例如,第一消息可以为RRC连接重配置(RRC Connection Reconfiguration)消息,第一响应可以为RRC连接重配置完成(RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete)消息;或者,第一消息可以为RRC连接建立之后的RRC建立完成(RRC Setup Complete)消息,第一响应可以为RRC连接重配置(RRC Connection Reconfiguration)消息。Wherein, both the first message and the first response may be radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) messages. For example, the first message may be an RRC Connection Reconfiguration (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) message, and the first response may be an RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete (RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete) message; or, the first message may be an RRC establishment after an RRC connection is established Complete (RRC Setup Complete) message, the first response may be an RRC Connection Reconfiguration (RRC Connection Reconfiguration) message.
其中,第一响应可以为NAS消息。Wherein, the first response may be a NAS message.
在情况2下,可选的,该方法还包括:In case 2, optionally, the method further includes:
9-1)第一终端接入的接入网设备向为该接入网设备提供服务的UPF发送第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示UPF第一终端加入第一会话。相应的,UPF接收第二指示信息,UPF将第一终端与IP地址集中的IP地址绑定。9-1) The access network device accessed by the first terminal sends second indication information to the UPF serving the access network device, where the second indication information is used to instruct the UPF first terminal to join the first session. Correspondingly, the UPF receives the second indication information, and the UPF binds the first terminal to the IP address in the IP address set.
需要说明的是,一种情况下,本申请中的第一会话可以仅包括一个QoS流,终端组中的终端共用该QoS流,此时,本申请实施例中的第一终端加入第一会话也可以理解为第一终端加入该QoS流。另一种情况下,第一会话包括多个QoS流,该情况下,UPF在接收到第二指示信息之后,由于第二指示信息为一个新的信息,因此,UPF可以根据第二指示信息确定第一终端加入的为终端组对应的QoS流。当然,第二指示信息也可以直接指示第一终端加入到了第一会话的哪个QoS流,本申请不作限制。It should be noted that, in one case, the first session in the present application may include only one QoS flow, and the terminals in the terminal group share the QoS flow. In this case, the first terminal in this embodiment of the present application joins the first session It can also be understood that the first terminal joins the QoS flow. In another case, the first session includes multiple QoS flows. In this case, after the UPF receives the second indication information, since the second indication information is new information, the UPF can determine according to the second indication information The first terminal joins the QoS flow corresponding to the terminal group. Of course, the second indication information may also directly indicate which QoS flow of the first session the first terminal has joined, which is not limited in this application.
在情况2下,可选的,该方法还包括:In case 2, optionally, the method further includes:
10-1)UPF根据第二指示信息调整PDR。10-1) The UPF adjusts the PDR according to the second indication information.
需要说明的是,现有技术中,每个终端单独进行PDU会话的建立,因此,每个终端各自使用一个QoS流,每个QoS流有固定的带宽。而在本申请中,多个终端可以共用一个QoS流,终端越多需要的带宽越多,例如,若1个终端需要2M带宽,那么2个终端就需要4M带宽,相应的,3个终端就需要6M带宽,依次类推。因此,当有新的终端加入第一会话时,UPF和接入网设备需要增加QoS流的带宽。类似的,当有新的终端退出第一会话时,UPF和接入网设备需要减少QoS流的带宽。It should be noted that, in the prior art, each terminal independently establishes a PDU session. Therefore, each terminal uses one QoS flow, and each QoS flow has a fixed bandwidth. In this application, multiple terminals can share a QoS flow. The more terminals, the more bandwidth required. For example, if one terminal needs 2M bandwidth, then two terminals need 4M bandwidth. Correspondingly, three terminals need to 6M bandwidth is required, and so on. Therefore, when a new terminal joins the first session, the UPF and the access network equipment need to increase the bandwidth of the QoS flow. Similarly, when a new terminal exits the first session, the UPF and the access network equipment need to reduce the bandwidth of the QoS flow.
在情况2下,根据M的取值的不同,可以分为以下场景1(M=1)和场景2(M>1),以下对场景1和场景2本申请提供的方法的进一步方案进行阐述。In case 2, according to the different values of M, it can be divided into the following scenario 1 (M=1) and scenario 2 (M>1). The following describes the further scheme of the method provided by the present application for scenario 1 and scenario 2. .
场景1、M=1Scenario 1, M=1
在场景1下,由于终端组中的所有终端都接入了同一个接入网设备,因此,终端组中的终端的IP地址可以由该同一个接入网设备分配,因此,该方法还可以包括:In scenario 1, since all the terminals in the terminal group are connected to the same access network device, the IP addresses of the terminals in the terminal group can be allocated by the same access network device. Therefore, this method can also include:
11-1)接入网设备根据IP地址集为第一终端分配IP地址。11-1) The access network device allocates an IP address to the first terminal according to the IP address set.
11-2)接入网设备向第一终端发送为第一终端分配的IP地址。11-2) The access network device sends the IP address allocated for the first terminal to the first terminal.
场景2、M>1Scenario 2, M>1
在场景2下,由于终端组中的所有终端接入了不同的接入网设备,因此,终端组中的终端的IP地址可以由AMF分配后,通过终端接入的接入网设备发送给终端,因此,该方法还可以包括:In Scenario 2, since all the terminals in the terminal group access different access network devices, the IP addresses of the terminals in the terminal group can be allocated by AMF and then sent to the terminals through the access network devices accessed by the terminals. , so the method can also include:
12-1)接入网设备向AMF发送IP地址请求,IP地址请求用于为第一终端请求IP地址。相应的,AMF从接入网设备接收IP地址请求。12-1) The access network device sends an IP address request to the AMF, where the IP address request is used to request an IP address for the first terminal. Correspondingly, the AMF receives the IP address request from the access network device.
12-2)AMF根据IP地址集为第一终端分配IP地址。12-2) The AMF allocates an IP address to the first terminal according to the IP address set.
12-3)AMF向接入网设备发送为第一终端分配的IP地址。相应的,接入网设备从AMF接收AMF为第一终端分配的IP地址。12-3) The AMF sends the IP address allocated for the first terminal to the access network device. Correspondingly, the access network device receives the IP address allocated by the AMF for the first terminal from the AMF.
12-4)接入网设备向第一终端发送为第一终端分配的IP地址。12-4) The access network device sends the IP address allocated for the first terminal to the first terminal.
需要说明的是,接入网设备在向第一终端发送IP地址和终端组的会话上下文时,可以将IP地址和终端组的会话上下文携带在同一个消息中发送给第一终端,也可以携带在不同的消息中发送给第一终端,本申请不作限制。It should be noted that, when the access network device sends the IP address and the session context of the terminal group to the first terminal, it may carry the IP address and the session context of the terminal group in the same message and send it to the first terminal, or may carry the IP address and the session context of the terminal group in the same message. It is sent to the first terminal in different messages, which is not limited in this application.
以上是对情况1和情况2下,本申请提供的方法的具体阐述。需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,IP地址集也可以由UPF分配,该情况下,AMF获取的IP地址集由UPF发送给SMF,再由SMF发送给AMF,该情况下,可以理解的是,SMF不需要再将IP地址集发送给UPF。The above is a specific description of the method provided by the present application in case 1 and case 2. It should be noted that, in this embodiment of the present application, the IP address set may also be allocated by the UPF. In this case, the IP address set obtained by the AMF is sent by the UPF to the SMF, and then sent by the SMF to the AMF. In this case, it can be understood that The good thing is that the SMF does not need to send the IP address set to the UPF anymore.
以下对终端组中的终端(记为第三终端)停止工作时,本申请提供的方法的进一步方案进行阐述。The following describes a further solution of the method provided by the present application when the terminal in the terminal group (referred to as the third terminal) stops working.
在终端组中的第三终端停止工作的情况下,该方法还包括:When the third terminal in the terminal group stops working, the method further includes:
13-1)AMF根据第三终端的上下文获取第三终端接入的接入网设备的标识和第三终端的标识。13-1) The AMF obtains, according to the context of the third terminal, the identity of the access network device accessed by the third terminal and the identity of the third terminal.
13-2)AMF向第三终端接入的接入网设备发送第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示第三终端停止工作。第三指示信息中可以包括一个指示停止工作的信息和第三终端的标识,从而指示第三终端停止工作。相应的,第三终端接入的接入网设备从AMF接收第三指示信息,根据第三指示信息确定第三终端停止工作。13-2) The AMF sends third indication information to the access network device accessed by the third terminal, where the third indication information is used to instruct the third terminal to stop working. The third indication information may include information indicating stop working and an identifier of the third terminal, thereby instructing the third terminal to stop working. Correspondingly, the access network device accessed by the third terminal receives the third indication information from the AMF, and determines that the third terminal stops working according to the third indication information.
13-3)接入网设备释放与第三终端之间的连接(例如,RRC连接)。13-3) The access network device releases the connection with the third terminal (eg, RRC connection).
在终端组中的第三终端停止工作的情况下,该方法还包括:When the third terminal in the terminal group stops working, the method further includes:
14-1)AMF回收第三终端的IP地址。14-1) The AMF reclaims the IP address of the third terminal.
在终端组中的第三终端停止工作的情况下,可以通过以下方式一或方式二,告知UPF第三终端离开第一会话。In the case that the third terminal in the terminal group stops working, the UPF may be informed that the third terminal leaves the first session through the following manner 1 or manner 2.
方式一method one
方式一包括:Method 1 includes:
15-1)第三终端接入的接入网设备向为该接入网设备提供服务的UPF发送第六指示信息和第四指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示UPF第三终端离开第一会话,第六指示信息用于指示第三终端的IP地址。相应的,UPF接收第六指示信息和第四指示信息。15-1) The access network device accessed by the third terminal sends sixth indication information and fourth indication information to the UPF serving the access network device, and the fourth indication information is used to instruct the UPF third terminal to leave the first session, the sixth indication information is used to indicate the IP address of the third terminal. Correspondingly, the UPF receives the sixth indication information and the fourth indication information.
方式二Method 2
方式二包括:The second method includes:
16-1)AMF接收来自于第三终端接入的接入网设备的第六指示信息。16-1) The AMF receives the sixth indication information from the access network device accessed by the third terminal.
16-2)AMF通过SMF向为第三终端接入的接入网设备服务的UPF发送第四指示 信息和第六指示信息,第四指示信息用于指示UPF所述第三终端离开第一会话,第六指示信息用于指示第三终端的IP地址。相应的,UPF接收第六指示信息和第四指示信息。16-2) The AMF sends fourth indication information and sixth indication information to the UPF serving the access network device accessed by the third terminal through the SMF, and the fourth indication information is used to instruct the UPF to leave the first session by the third terminal , and the sixth indication information is used to indicate the IP address of the third terminal. Correspondingly, the UPF receives the sixth indication information and the fourth indication information.
其中,上述第六指示信息可以为第三终端的IP地址,也可以为第三终端的IP地址的标识,例如,第三终端的IP地址对应的编号或序号,该编号或序号可以指示第三终端的IP地址在IP地址集中的位置。The above-mentioned sixth indication information may be the IP address of the third terminal, or may be an identifier of the IP address of the third terminal, for example, the number or serial number corresponding to the IP address of the third terminal, and the number or serial number may indicate the third terminal. The location of the terminal's IP address in the IP address set.
需要说明的是,一种情况下,本申请中的第一会话可以仅包括一个QoS流,终端组中的终端共用该QoS流,此时,本申请实施例中的第三终端离开第一会话也可以理解为第三终端离开该QoS流。另一种情况下,第一会话包括多个QoS流,该情况下,UPF在接收到第四指示信息之后,由于第四指示信息为一个新的信息,因此,UPF可以根据第四指示信息确定第三终端离开的为终端组对应的QoS流。当然,第四指示信息也可以直接指示第三终端离开了第一会话的哪个QoS流,本申请不作限制。It should be noted that, in one case, the first session in the present application may include only one QoS flow, and the terminals in the terminal group share the QoS flow. In this case, the third terminal in this embodiment of the present application leaves the first session It can also be understood that the third terminal leaves the QoS flow. In another case, the first session includes multiple QoS flows. In this case, after the UPF receives the fourth indication information, since the fourth indication information is new information, the UPF can determine according to the fourth indication information What the third terminal leaves is the QoS flow corresponding to the terminal group. Of course, the fourth indication information may also directly indicate which QoS flow of the first session the third terminal has left, which is not limited in this application.
在方式一和方式二下,该方法还包括步骤17-1)和/或步骤17-2):Under the first mode and the second mode, the method further includes step 17-1) and/or step 17-2):
17-1)UPF根据第四指示信息和第六指示信息回收第三终端的IP地址。17-1) The UPF reclaims the IP address of the third terminal according to the fourth indication information and the sixth indication information.
17-2)UPF根据所述第四指示信息调整PDR。17-2) The UPF adjusts the PDR according to the fourth indication information.
在上述实施例中,一旦有终端加入(例如,上述第一终端)或终端停止工作(例如,上述第三终端)时,上述方法还包括:In the above embodiment, once a terminal joins (for example, the above-mentioned first terminal) or the terminal stops working (for example, the above-mentioned third terminal), the above-mentioned method further includes:
18-1)接入网设备根据终端组中的当前接入接入网设备的终端个数和终端组的会话上下文,对第一QoS流的QoS profile进行调整。例如,若终端组的会话上下文中的带宽为2M,接入接入网设备的终端个数为5,则接入网设备可以将当前的QoS profile中的带宽调整为10M。其中,带宽信息可以是最大流速率(maximum flow bit rate,MFBR)或保证流速率(guaranteed flow bit rate,GFBR),在此不做限制。18-1) The access network device adjusts the QoS profile of the first QoS flow according to the number of terminals currently accessing the access network device in the terminal group and the session context of the terminal group. For example, if the bandwidth in the session context of the terminal group is 2M, and the number of terminals accessing the access network device is 5, the access network device can adjust the bandwidth in the current QoS profile to 10M. The bandwidth information may be a maximum flow rate (maximum flow bit rate, MFBR) or a guaranteed flow rate (guaranteed flow bit rate, GFBR), which is not limited here.
在上述实施例中,SMF在获取到PCC规则之后,可以根据PCC规则生成QoS profile,并向接入网设备发送QoS profile。In the above embodiment, after acquiring the PCC rule, the SMF can generate a QoS profile according to the PCC rule, and send the QoS profile to the access network device.
在上述实施例中,AMF或接入网设备为终端分配IP地址,以及UPF为终端绑定IP地址时,均是按照IP地址集中的IP地址的顺序依次进行分配和绑定的,其中,IP地址的顺序具体可以有以下几种,当然也可以为其他顺序,本申请不作限制。In the above embodiment, when the AMF or the access network device assigns the IP address to the terminal, and when the UPF binds the IP address to the terminal, the assignment and binding are performed in sequence according to the sequence of the IP addresses in the IP address set. The sequence of addresses may specifically include the following, and of course, other sequences may be used, which are not limited in this application.
第一种:IP地址由大至小或由小至大的顺序。The first: the order of IP addresses from large to small or from small to large.
例如,若IP地址集中包括3个IP地址,分别为10.2.2.2.3,10.2.2.2.4,10.2.2.2.5。那么,AMF或接入网设备可以按照10.2.2.2.3-10.2.2.2.4-10.2.2.2.5的顺序依次为终端分配IP地址,类似的,UPF按照10.2.2.2.3-10.2.2.2.4-10.2.2.2.5的顺序依次为终端绑定IP地址。For example, if the IP address set includes 3 IP addresses, they are 10.2.2.2.3, 10.2.2.2.4, and 10.2.2.2.5 respectively. Then, the AMF or the access network device can assign IP addresses to the terminals in the order of 10.2.2.2.3-10.2.2.2.4-10.2.2.2.5. Similarly, the UPF can follow the order of 10.2.2.2.3-10.2.2.2 The sequence of .4-10.2.2.2.5 is the terminal binding IP address.
第二种:IP地址表中从前至后或从后至前的顺序。The second type: front-to-back or back-to-front order in the IP address table.
例如,若IP地址集中包括如表2所示的3个IP地址。若IP地址的顺序为IP地址表中从前至后的顺序。那么,AMF或接入网设备可以按照10.2.2.2.3-10.2.2.2.4-10.2.2.2.5的顺序依次为终端分配IP地址,类似的,UPF按照10.2.2.2.3-10.2.2.2.4-10.2.2.2.5的顺序依次为终端绑定IP地址。For example, if the IP address set includes three IP addresses as shown in Table 2. If the order of IP addresses is from front to back in the IP address table. Then, the AMF or the access network device can assign IP addresses to the terminals in the order of 10.2.2.2.3-10.2.2.2.4-10.2.2.2.5. Similarly, the UPF can follow the order of 10.2.2.2.3-10.2.2.2 The sequence of .4-10.2.2.2.5 is the terminal binding IP address.
表2Table 2
IP地址IP address
10.2.2.2.310.2.2.2.3
10.2.2.2.410.2.2.2.4
10.2.2.2.510.2.2.2.5
第三种:按照IP地址对应的编号由大至小或由小至大的顺序。The third type: according to the order of the numbers corresponding to the IP addresses from large to small or from small to large.
例如,若IP地址集中包括如表3所示的3个IP地址。若IP地址的顺序为IP地址对应的编号由小至大的顺序。那么,AMF或接入网设备可以按照10.2.2.2.3-10.2.2.2.4-10.2.2.2.5的顺序依次为终端分配IP地址,类似的,UPF按照10.2.2.2.3-10.2.2.2.4-10.2.2.2.5的顺序依次为终端绑定IP地址。For example, if the IP address set includes three IP addresses as shown in Table 3. If the order of the IP addresses is the order of the numbers corresponding to the IP addresses from small to large. Then, the AMF or the access network device can assign IP addresses to the terminals in the order of 10.2.2.2.3-10.2.2.2.4-10.2.2.2.5. Similarly, the UPF can follow the order of 10.2.2.2.3-10.2.2.2 The sequence of .4-10.2.2.2.5 is the terminal binding IP address.
表3table 3
IP地址对应的编号The number corresponding to the IP address IP地址IP address
11 10.2.2.2.310.2.2.2.3
22 10.2.2.2.410.2.2.2.4
33 10.2.2.2.510.2.2.2.5
为了使得本申请实施例更加的清楚,以终端为摄像头为例,通过以下实施例1至实施例7对本申请上述实施例提供的方法做示例性说明。In order to make the embodiments of the present application clearer, taking the terminal as a camera as an example, the following Embodiments 1 to 7 are used to illustrate the methods provided by the foregoing embodiments of the present application.
实施例1Example 1
实施例1描述了在摄像头注册过程中,AMF根据是否向摄像头接入的接入网设备下发了摄像头组的会话上下文,确定是否向摄像头发送第一指示信息的过程。Embodiment 1 describes the process in which the AMF determines whether to send the first indication information to the camera according to whether the session context of the camera group is delivered to the access network device connected to the camera during the camera registration process.
参见图3,实施例1提供的方法包括:Referring to Figure 3, the method provided by Embodiment 1 includes:
301、摄像头安装并开机之后,摄像头向AMF发送注册请求。301. After the camera is installed and powered on, the camera sends a registration request to the AMF.
其中,注册请求中可以包括摄像头标识。摄像头可以通过接入网设备和AMF通信。The registration request may include a camera identifier. The camera can communicate with the AMF through the access network device.
302、AMF通过与其他网元交互执行注册流程(registration procedure)。302. The AMF performs a registration procedure (registration procedure) by interacting with other network elements.
303、AMF根据摄像头标识确定摄像头所属的摄像头组,并判断摄像头组的会话上下文是否下发给摄像头接入的接入网设备。303. The AMF determines the camera group to which the camera belongs according to the camera identifier, and determines whether the session context of the camera group is delivered to the access network device to which the camera is connected.
若是,说明摄像头组中已经有其他摄像头请求建立过会话,步骤303之后执行步骤304,若否,说明该摄像头为摄像头组中的首个请求建立会话的摄像头,步骤303之后执行步骤305。If yes, it means that other cameras in the camera group have already requested to establish a session, and after step 303, step 304 is performed;
304、AMF向摄像头发送注册响应,注册响应中包括第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示摄像头向接入的接入网设备获取摄像头组的会话上下文。304. The AMF sends a registration response to the camera, where the registration response includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to instruct the camera to obtain the session context of the camera group from the connected access network device.
305、AMF向摄像头发送注册响应。305. The AMF sends a registration response to the camera.
其中,注册请求和注册响应均可以为NAS消息。Wherein, both the registration request and the registration response may be NAS messages.
在上述过程中,步骤302和步骤303的执行顺序不分先后。In the above process, step 302 and step 303 are executed in no particular order.
实施例2Example 2
实施例2对M个接入网设备为一个接入网设备的情况下,摄像头组中的首个摄像头(记为摄像头1)建立会话的过程作示例性说明,该情况下,摄像头1在注册过程中,未接收到第一指示信息。Embodiment 2 exemplifies the process of establishing a session for the first camera in the camera group (referred to as camera 1) when the M access network devices are one access network device. In this case, camera 1 is registering. During the process, the first indication information is not received.
参见图4,实施例2提供的方法包括:Referring to Figure 4, the method provided by Embodiment 2 includes:
401、摄像头1通过接入网设备向AMF发送第二消息。相应的,AMF通过接入网 设备从摄像头1接收第二消息。401. The camera 1 sends a second message to the AMF through the access network device. Correspondingly, the AMF receives the second message from the camera 1 through the access network device.
其中,第二消息用于请求为摄像头1建立PDU会话,第二消息可以为NAS消息。The second message is used to request to establish a PDU session for the camera 1, and the second message may be a NAS message.
示例性的,第二消息可以为PDU会话建立请求(PDU session establishment request)。Exemplarily, the second message may be a PDU session establishment request (PDU session establishment request).
402、AMF确定摄像头1为摄像头组中的首个请求建立PDU会话的摄像头。402. The AMF determines that the camera 1 is the first camera in the camera group that requests to establish a PDU session.
具体的,AMF可以通过确定摄像头组中是否有其他摄像头请求建立过PDU会话,若否,则确定摄像头1为摄像头组中的首个请求建立PDU会话的摄像头。Specifically, the AMF can determine whether other cameras in the camera group have requested to establish a PDU session, and if not, determine that camera 1 is the first camera in the camera group that requests to establish a PDU session.
其中,AMF可以根据摄像头组的信息(例如,哪些摄像头属于同一个摄像头组的信息,摄像头的位置信息等)判断摄像头1是否为摄像头组中的首个请求建立PDU会话的摄像头。The AMF can determine whether camera 1 is the first camera in the camera group to request the establishment of a PDU session according to the information of the camera group (for example, the information of which cameras belong to the same camera group, the location information of the cameras, etc.).
其中,AMF可以在摄像头1的注册流程中获取包含摄像头组的信息的签约信息,也可以在步骤402之前执行,本申请不作限制。Wherein, the AMF may acquire the contract information including the information of the camera group in the registration process of the camera 1, and may also execute it before step 402, which is not limited in this application.
403、AMF向SMF发送第三消息。相应的,SMF从AMF接收第三消息。403. The AMF sends a third message to the SMF. Accordingly, the SMF receives the third message from the AMF.
其中,第三消息中携带摄像头组的标识,第三消息用于请求摄像头组的会话上下文。第三消息可以为向SMF发送的PDU会话上下文建立请求(Nsmf_PDUSession_CreateSMContext Request)。The third message carries the identifier of the camera group, and the third message is used to request the session context of the camera group. The third message may be a PDU session context establishment request (Nsmf_PDUSession_CreateSMContext Request) sent to the SMF.
404、SMF向PCF发送第五指示信息,第五指示信息用于指示PCF为摄像头组制定对应的PCC规则。相应的,PCF从SMF接收第五指示信息。404. The SMF sends fifth indication information to the PCF, where the fifth indication information is used to instruct the PCF to formulate a corresponding PCC rule for the camera group. Correspondingly, the PCF receives the fifth indication information from the SMF.
其中,第五指示信息中可以包括摄像头组的标识。Wherein, the fifth indication information may include the identification of the camera group.
405、PCF根据第五指示信息向SMF发送为摄像头组制定的PCC规则。相应的,SMF从PCF接收PCF为摄像头组制定的PCC规则。405. The PCF sends the PCC rule formulated for the camera group to the SMF according to the fifth indication information. Correspondingly, the SMF receives the PCC rules formulated by the PCF for the camera group from the PCF.
其中,在发送为摄像头组制定的PCC规则之前,PCF可以根据第五指示信息为摄像头组制定PCC规则。Wherein, before sending the PCC rule formulated for the camera group, the PCF may formulate the PCC rule for the camera group according to the fifth instruction information.
步骤404和步骤405可以在会话管理策略关联建立(SM policy association establishment)/会话管理策略关联修改(SM policy association modification)流程中实现。 Steps 404 and 405 may be implemented in a session management policy association establishment (SM policy association establishment)/session management policy association modification (SM policy association modification) process.
406、SMF为摄像头组分配IP地址集。406. The SMF allocates an IP address set to the camera group.
407、SMF通过N4会话流程向UPF发送IP地址集和对应的PDR。相应的,UPF从SMF接收IP地址集和对应的PDR。407. The SMF sends the IP address set and the corresponding PDR to the UPF through the N4 session flow. Accordingly, the UPF receives the IP address set and the corresponding PDR from the SMF.
其中,UPF是为摄像头1接入的接入网设备服务的UPF。在步骤407之前,SMF可以根据PCC规则生成UPF对应的PDR。在接收到IP地址集和对应的PDR之后,UPF可以保存IP地址集和对应的PDR。The UPF is a UPF that serves the access network device connected to the camera 1 . Before step 407, the SMF may generate the PDR corresponding to the UPF according to the PCC rule. After receiving the IP address set and the corresponding PDR, the UPF may save the IP address set and the corresponding PDR.
其中,N4会话流程可以为N4会话建立(N4 session establishment)流程或N4会话修改(N4 session modification)流程。The N4 session process may be an N4 session establishment (N4 session establishment) process or an N4 session modification (N4 session modification) process.
408、SMF向AMF发送摄像头组的会话上下文和IP地址集。相应的,AMF从SMF接收摄像头组的会话上下文和IP地址集。408. The SMF sends the session context and IP address set of the camera group to the AMF. Accordingly, the AMF receives the session context and IP address set of the camera group from the SMF.
其中,在步骤408之前,SMF可以根据PCC规则生成摄像头组对应的QoS rule,再根据其他信息生成摄像头组的会话上下文中的其他信息,组成摄像头组的会话上下文后发送给AMF。其中,摄像头组的会话上下文和IP地址集可以携带在向AMF发送的N1N2传输消息(Namf_communication N1N2message transfer)中。Wherein, before step 408, the SMF can generate the QoS rule corresponding to the camera group according to the PCC rule, and then generate other information in the session context of the camera group according to other information, and then send the session context of the camera group to the AMF. The session context and IP address set of the camera group may be carried in the N1N2 transfer message (Namf_communication N1N2message transfer) sent to the AMF.
409、AMF向接入网设备发送摄像头组的会话上下文和来自SMF侧的N1 SM容 器与N2 SM容器。相应的,接入网设备接收摄像头组的会话上下文和来自SMF侧的N1 SM容器与N2 SM容器。409. The AMF sends the session context of the camera group and the N1 SM container and the N2 SM container from the SMF side to the access network device. Correspondingly, the access network device receives the session context of the camera group and the N1 SM container and the N2 SM container from the SMF side.
其中,N1 SM容器中可以包括PDU会话建立接受消息,PDU会话建立接受消息中包括摄像头1的会话上下文。N2 SM容器中可以包括SMF为接入网设备生成的QoS profile、IP地址集和终端组的标识。摄像头组的会话上下文可以位于N2 SM容器内,也可以位于N2 SM容器外,IP地址集和终端组的标识中的任意一个或多个也可以位于N2 SM容器外,本申请不作限制。接入网设备接收到摄像头组的会话上下文和IP地址集之后,保存摄像头组的会话上下文和IP地址集。The N1 SM container may include a PDU session establishment accept message, and the PDU session establishment accept message includes the session context of the camera 1. The N2 SM container may include the QoS profile, IP address set and terminal group identifier generated by the SMF for the access network device. The session context of the camera group may be located in the N2 SM container or outside the N2 SM container, and any one or more of the IP address set and the identifier of the terminal group may also be located outside the N2 SM container, which is not limited in this application. After receiving the session context and IP address set of the camera group, the access network device saves the session context and IP address set of the camera group.
其中,摄像头组的会话上下文和IP地址集可以携带在N2 PDU会话请求(N2 PDUsession request)中。The session context and IP address set of the camera group can be carried in the N2 PDU session request (N2 PDUsession request).
410、接入网设备将PDU会话建立接受消息发送给摄像头1。相应的,摄像头1接收PDU会话建立接受消息,根据PDU会话建立接受消息中的信息获取摄像头1的会话上下文。410 . The access network device sends a PDU session establishment acceptance message to the camera 1 . Correspondingly, the camera 1 receives the PDU session establishment accept message, and obtains the session context of the camera 1 according to the information in the PDU session establishment accept message.
需要说明的是,在PDU会话建立的过程中,接入网设备和UPF可以通过AMF、SMF交互隧道信息(例如,隧道地址信息),以便进行上下行数据的传输。It should be noted that, in the process of establishing a PDU session, the access network device and the UPF may exchange tunnel information (eg, tunnel address information) through AMF and SMF, so as to transmit uplink and downlink data.
实施例3Example 3
实施例3对M个接入网设备为一个接入网设备的情况下,摄像头组中的首个摄像头(即摄像头1)建立会话之后,其他摄像头(记为摄像头2)建立会话的过程作示例性说明,该情况下,摄像头2在注册过程中,接收到第一指示信息。 Embodiment 3 is an example of the process of establishing a session with other cameras (denoted as camera 2) after the first camera in the camera group (that is, camera 1) establishes a session when the M access network devices are one access network device. In this case, the camera 2 receives the first indication information during the registration process.
在一种情况下,参见图5,实施例3提供的方法包括:In one case, referring to FIG. 5, the method provided by Embodiment 3 includes:
501、摄像头2向接入网设备发送RRC消息,RRC消息中包括摄像头2所属的摄像头组的标识。相应的,接入网设备从摄像头2接收RRC消息。501. The camera 2 sends an RRC message to the access network device, where the RRC message includes the identifier of the camera group to which the camera 2 belongs. Correspondingly, the access network device receives the RRC message from the camera 2 .
502、接入网设备根据RRC消息中的摄像头组的标识确定是否存在摄像头组的会话上下文和IP地址集。502. The access network device determines whether there is a session context and an IP address set of the camera group according to the identifier of the camera group in the RRC message.
503、接入网设备向摄像头2发送RRC消息的响应消息。503. The access network device sends a response message of the RRC message to the camera 2.
其中,若接入网设备中存在摄像头组的会话上下文和IP地址集,响应消息中包括摄像头组的会话上下文和为摄像头2分配的IP地址。可选的,响应消息中还包括摄像头组的标识。Wherein, if the session context and IP address set of the camera group exist in the access network device, the response message includes the session context of the camera group and the IP address assigned to camera 2 . Optionally, the response message also includes an identifier of the camera group.
若接入网设备中不存在摄像头组的会话上下文和IP地址集,响应消息中包括一个指示信息,该指示信息可以指示摄像头2进行现有的PDU会话建立流程或者指示摄像头2未获取到摄像头组的会话上下文。If the session context and IP address set of the camera group do not exist in the access network device, the response message includes an indication message, which can instruct Camera 2 to perform the existing PDU session establishment process or indicate that Camera 2 has not acquired the camera group session context.
504、接入网设备根据摄像头组中的当前接入接入网设备的摄像头个数和摄像头组的会话上下文,对第一QoS流的QoS profile进行调整。504. The access network device adjusts the QoS profile of the first QoS flow according to the number of cameras currently accessing the access network device in the camera group and the session context of the camera group.
具体的,在摄像头2加入第一会话之后,若摄像头2的数据传输需要3M带宽,则接入网设备可以将第一QoS流的QoSprofile中的带宽增加3M。Specifically, after the camera 2 joins the first session, if the data transmission of the camera 2 requires 3M bandwidth, the access network device may increase the bandwidth in the QoS profile of the first QoS flow by 3M.
505、接入网设备向为该接入网设备提供服务的UPF发送第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示UPF摄像头2加入第一会话。相应的,UPF从接入网设备接收第二指示信息。505. The access network device sends second indication information to the UPF that provides the service for the access network device, where the second indication information is used to instruct the UPF camera 2 to join the first session. Correspondingly, the UPF receives the second indication information from the access network device.
其中,接入网设备可以在通用分组无线服务隧道协议(general packet radio service  tunneling protocol,GTP)层(例如,GTP用户面(GTP-user plane,GTP-U)层)添加第二指示信息。The access network device may add the second indication information at a general packet radio service tunneling protocol (GTP) layer (for example, a GTP-user plane (GTP-user plane, GTP-U) layer).
506、UPF对第一QoS流的PDR进行调整,并将IP地址集中的IP地址与摄像头2绑定。506 . The UPF adjusts the PDR of the first QoS flow, and binds the IP address in the IP address set with the camera 2 .
其中,UPF对第一QoS流的PDR进行调整的方法与接入网设备类似,不再赘述。The method for adjusting the PDR of the first QoS flow by the UPF is similar to that of the access network device, and details are not repeated here.
在另一种情况下,参见图6,实施例3提供的方法包括:In another case, referring to FIG. 6 , the method provided by Embodiment 3 includes:
601、摄像头2向接入网设备发送RRC消息,RRC消息中包括用于请求PDU会话建立的NAS信息和摄像头2所属的摄像头组的标识。601. The camera 2 sends an RRC message to the access network device, where the RRC message includes the NAS information for requesting the establishment of the PDU session and the identifier of the camera group to which the camera 2 belongs.
602、接入网设备根据RRC消息中的摄像头组的标识确定是否存在摄像头组的会话上下文和IP地址集。602. The access network device determines whether there is a session context and an IP address set of the camera group according to the identifier of the camera group in the RRC message.
若是,执行步骤603,若否,执行步骤604和步骤605。If yes, go to step 603, if not, go to step 604 and step 605.
603、接入网设备向摄像头2发送RRC消息的响应消息,RRC消息的响应消息中包括摄像头组的会话上下文和为摄像头2分配的IP地址。603 . The access network device sends a response message of the RRC message to the camera 2 , where the response message of the RRC message includes the session context of the camera group and the IP address assigned to the camera 2 .
604、接入网设备将RRC消息中的用于请求PDU会话建立的NAS信息发送给AMF。604. The access network device sends the NAS information in the RRC message for requesting the establishment of the PDU session to the AMF.
605、在后续过程中,接入网设备会再次保存摄像头组的会话上下文和IP地址集,并向摄像头2发送摄像头2的会话上下文和为摄像头2分配的IP地址,或者,将来自核心网的PDU会话建立接受消息发送给摄像头2。605. In the subsequent process, the access network device will save the session context and IP address set of the camera group again, and send the session context of the camera 2 and the IP address assigned to the camera 2 to the camera 2, or transfer the The PDU session establishment accept message is sent to camera 2.
其中,PDU会话建立接受消息中包括摄像头组的会话上下文和为摄像头2分配的IP地址。The PDU session establishment accept message includes the session context of the camera group and the IP address assigned to the camera 2 .
606-608、与上述步骤504至步骤506分别相同。Steps 606 to 608 are the same as the above steps 504 to 506 respectively.
实施例4Example 4
实施例4对M个接入网设备为多个接入网设备的情况下,摄像头组中的首个摄像头(记为摄像头1)建立会话的过程作示例性说明,该情况下,摄像头1在注册过程中,未接收到第一指示信息。Embodiment 4 exemplifies the process of establishing a session for the first camera in the camera group (denoted as camera 1) when the M access network devices are multiple access network devices. During the registration process, the first indication information is not received.
参见图7,实施例4提供的方法包括:Referring to Figure 7, the method provided by Embodiment 4 includes:
701-708、与步骤401至步骤408分别相同。701-708 are the same as steps 401 to 408 respectively.
709、AMF保存IP地址集。709. The AMF stores the IP address set.
710、AMF向接入网设备发送摄像头组的会话上下文和来自SMF侧的N1 SM容器与N2 SM容器。相应的,接入网设备接收摄像头组的会话上下文和来自SMF侧的N1 SM容器与N2 SM容器。710. The AMF sends the session context of the camera group and the N1 SM container and the N2 SM container from the SMF side to the access network device. Correspondingly, the access network device receives the session context of the camera group and the N1 SM container and the N2 SM container from the SMF side.
其中,N1 SM容器中可以包括PDU会话建立接受消息,PDU会话建立接受消息中包括摄像头1的会话上下文。N2 SM容器中可以包括SMF为接入网设备生成的QoS profile和终端组的标识。摄像头组的会话上下文可以位于N2 SM容器内,也可以位于N2 SM容器外,终端组的标识也可以位于N2 SM容器外,本申请不作限制。The N1 SM container may include a PDU session establishment accept message, and the PDU session establishment accept message includes the session context of the camera 1. The N2 SM container may include the QoS profile generated by the SMF for the access network device and the identifier of the terminal group. The session context of the camera group may be located in the N2 SM container or outside the N2 SM container, and the identifier of the terminal group may also be located outside the N2 SM container, which is not limited in this application.
711、接入网设备将PDU会话建立接受消息发送给摄像头1。相应的,摄像头1接收PDU会话建立接受消息,根据PDU会话建立接受消息中的信息获取摄像头1的会话上下文。711 . The access network device sends a PDU session establishment acceptance message to the camera 1 . Correspondingly, the camera 1 receives the PDU session establishment accept message, and obtains the session context of the camera 1 according to the information in the PDU session establishment accept message.
712、AMF向M-1个接入网设备(除摄像头1接入的接入网设备之外的)发送摄像头组的会话上下文。相应的,每个接入网设备从AMF接收并存储摄像头组的会话 上下文。712. The AMF sends the session context of the camera group to M-1 access network devices (except the access network device connected to camera 1). Accordingly, each access network device receives and stores the session context of the camera group from the AMF.
在步骤712之前,AMF可以根据摄像头的位置信息确定摄像头组中的摄像头位于哪些接入网设备的覆盖范围之内。Before step 712, the AMF may determine, according to the location information of the cameras, which access network devices the cameras in the camera group are located within the coverage range.
需要说明的是,在PDU会话建立的过程中,接入网设备和UPF可以通过AMF、SMF交互隧道信息(例如,隧道地址信息),以便进行上下行数据的传输。It should be noted that, in the process of establishing a PDU session, the access network device and the UPF may exchange tunnel information (eg, tunnel address information) through AMF and SMF, so as to transmit uplink and downlink data.
实施例5Example 5
实施例5对M个接入网设备为多个接入网设备的情况下,摄像头组中的首个摄像头(即摄像头1)建立会话之后,其他摄像头(记为摄像头2)建立会话的过程作示例性说明,该情况下,摄像头2在注册过程中,接收到第一指示信息。Embodiment 5 In the case where the M access network devices are multiple access network devices, after the first camera in the camera group (that is, camera 1) establishes a session, the process of establishing sessions for other cameras (denoted as camera 2) is as follows. For example, in this case, the camera 2 receives the first indication information during the registration process.
在一种情况下,参见图8,实施例5提供的方法包括:In one case, referring to FIG. 8 , the method provided by Embodiment 5 includes:
801、摄像头2向接入网设备发送RRC消息,RRC消息中包括摄像头2所属的摄像头组的标识。相应的,接入网设备从摄像头2接收RRC消息。801. The camera 2 sends an RRC message to the access network device, where the RRC message includes the identifier of the camera group to which the camera 2 belongs. Correspondingly, the access network device receives the RRC message from the camera 2 .
802、接入网设备根据RRC消息中的摄像头组的标识确定是否存在摄像头组的会话上下文和IP地址集。802. The access network device determines, according to the identifier of the camera group in the RRC message, whether there is a session context and an IP address set of the camera group.
若接入网设备中存在摄像头组的会话上下文,不存在IP地址集,执行步骤803至步骤806。若接入网设备不存在摄像头组的会话上下文和IP地址集,执行步骤807。If the session context of the camera group exists in the access network device, and there is no IP address set, step 803 to step 806 are performed. If the access network device does not have the session context and IP address set of the camera group, step 807 is performed.
803、接入网设备通过N2会话流程向AMF请求摄像头2的IP地址。803. The access network device requests the IP address of the camera 2 from the AMF through the N2 session process.
804、AMF根据IP地址集为摄像头2分配IP地址。804. The AMF assigns an IP address to the camera 2 according to the IP address set.
805、AMF向接入网设备发送为摄像头2分配的IP地址。805. The AMF sends the IP address allocated for the camera 2 to the access network device.
806、接入网设备向摄像头2发送RRC消息的响应消息,响应消息中包括摄像头组的会话上下文和为摄像头2分配的IP地址。806 . The access network device sends a response message of the RRC message to the camera 2 , where the response message includes the session context of the camera group and the IP address assigned to the camera 2 .
807、接入网设备向摄像头2发送RRC消息的响应消息,响应消息中包括一个指示信息,该指示信息可以指示摄像头2进行现有的PDU会话建立流程或者指示摄像头2未获取到摄像头组的会话上下文。807. The access network device sends a response message of the RRC message to the camera 2, where the response message includes an indication information, and the indication information can instruct the camera 2 to perform the existing PDU session establishment process or indicate that the camera 2 has not acquired the session of the camera group context.
808-810、与步骤504至步骤506分别相同。808-810 are the same as steps 504 to 506, respectively.
在另一种情况下,参见图9,实施例5提供的方法包括:In another case, referring to FIG. 9, the method provided by Embodiment 5 includes:
901、摄像头2向接入网设备发送RRC消息,RRC消息中包括用于请求PDU会话建立的NAS信息和摄像头2所属的摄像头组的标识。901. The camera 2 sends an RRC message to the access network device, where the RRC message includes the NAS information for requesting the establishment of the PDU session and the identifier of the camera group to which the camera 2 belongs.
902、接入网设备根据RRC消息中的摄像头组的标识确定是否存在摄像头组的会话上下文和IP地址集。902. The access network device determines whether there is a session context and an IP address set of the camera group according to the identifier of the camera group in the RRC message.
若接入网设备中存在摄像头组的会话上下文,不存在IP地址集,执行步骤903至步骤906。若接入网设备不存在摄像头组的会话上下文和IP地址集,执行步骤907和步骤908。If the session context of the camera group exists in the access network device and the IP address set does not exist, step 903 to step 906 are performed. If the access network device does not have the session context and IP address set of the camera group, step 907 and step 908 are performed.
903-906、与步骤803至步骤806分别相同。903-906 are the same as steps 803 to 806 respectively.
907、接入网设备将RRC消息中的用于请求PDU会话建立的NAS信息发送给AMF。907. The access network device sends the NAS information in the RRC message for requesting the establishment of the PDU session to the AMF.
908、在后续过程中,接入网设备会再次保存摄像头组的会话上下文,并向摄像头2发送摄像头2的会话上下文和AMF为摄像头2分配的IP地址,或者,将来自核心网的PDU会话建立接受消息发送给摄像头2。908. In the subsequent process, the access network device will save the session context of the camera group again, and send the session context of camera 2 and the IP address assigned by AMF to camera 2 to camera 2, or establish a PDU session from the core network. Accept the message to send to camera 2.
其中,PDU会话建立接受消息中包括摄像头组的会话上下文和AMF为摄像头2 分配的IP地址。步骤908的实现流程可参见终端组中的首个终端建立会话的过程进行理解,不再赘述。The PDU session establishment accept message includes the session context of the camera group and the IP address assigned by the AMF to the camera 2 . The implementation process of step 908 can be understood by referring to the process of establishing a session by the first terminal in the terminal group, and details are not repeated here.
909-911、与步骤504至步骤506分别相同。909-911 are the same as steps 504 to 506 respectively.
实施例6Example 6
实施例6对M个接入网设备为一个接入网设备的情况下,摄像头组中的摄像头(记为摄像头3)停止工作时,需要删除对应的会话上下文信息、释放RRC连接并进行QoS流的QoS调整,以下对这些过程进行示例性说明。Embodiment 6 When the M access network devices are one access network device, when the camera in the camera group (referred to as camera 3) stops working, it is necessary to delete the corresponding session context information, release the RRC connection and perform QoS flow. QoS adjustment of the QoS, and these processes are exemplified below.
参见图10,实施例6提供的方法包括:Referring to Figure 10, the method provided by Embodiment 6 includes:
1001、在摄像头3停止工作时,AF指示UDM在摄像头组的信息中删除摄像头3,UDM根据该指示修改摄像头3的签约数据,UDM通知SMF修改后的摄像头3的签约数据。1001. When the camera 3 stops working, the AF instructs the UDM to delete the camera 3 from the information of the camera group, the UDM modifies the subscription data of the camera 3 according to the instruction, and the UDM notifies the SMF of the modified subscription data of the camera 3.
其中,UDM可以通过Nudm_SDM_notification通知SMF修改后的摄像头3的签约数据,SMF根据修改后的摄像头3的签约数据即可确定摄像头3不再属于摄像头组。The UDM can notify the SMF of the modified subscription data of the camera 3 through Nudm_SDM_notification, and the SMF can determine that the camera 3 no longer belongs to the camera group according to the modified subscription data of the camera 3 .
其中,摄像头3可能由于各种原因停止工作,例如,外部物理实体损坏,再例如,AF或第三方希望摄像头3终止工作,若第三方希望摄像头3终止工作,则第三方可以通知AF。后续过程中,摄像头3在可以正常工作时,AF可以指示UDM重新将摄像头3加入到摄像头组中。1002、AF向SMF发送通知信息,通知信息用于通知SMF摄像头3停止工作。The camera 3 may stop working due to various reasons, for example, the external physical entity is damaged, and for example, AF or a third party wants the camera 3 to stop working. If the third party wants the camera 3 to stop working, the third party can notify the AF. In the subsequent process, when the camera 3 can work normally, the AF can instruct the UDM to re-add the camera 3 to the camera group. 1002. The AF sends notification information to the SMF, where the notification information is used to notify the SMF that the camera 3 stops working.
其中,通知信息中可以包括摄像头3的身份信息和指示停止工作的信息。摄像头3的身份信息可以为摄像头3的用户永久标识(subscriber permanent identifier,SUPI)。Wherein, the notification information may include identity information of the camera 3 and information indicating to stop working. The identity information of the camera 3 may be a user permanent identifier (subscriber permanent identifier, SUPI) of the camera 3 .
AF可以通过NEF与SMF通信。AF can communicate with SMF via NEF.
其中,步骤1001和步骤1002中执行一个步骤即可。Wherein, only one step in step 1001 and step 1002 may be executed.
1003、SMF通知AMF摄像头3的SUPI。1003 . The SMF notifies the SUPI of the AMF camera 3 .
其中,摄像头3的SUPI可以携带在Namf_Communication_N1N2MessageTransfer中。Among them, the SUPI of camera 3 can be carried in Namf_Communication_N1N2MessageTransfer.
1004、AMF根据摄像头3的SUPI和摄像头3的会话上下文确定摄像头3接入的接入网设备和摄像头3的临时移动用户标识(S-Temporary mobile subscriber identity,S-TMSI)。1004. The AMF determines, according to the SUPI of the camera 3 and the session context of the camera 3, the access network device that the camera 3 accesses and the temporary mobile subscriber identity (S-Temporary mobile subscriber identity, S-TMSI) of the camera 3.
其中,由于摄像头3的SUPI接入网设备无法识别,因此,需要将摄像头3的SUPI转换为S-TMSI后发送给接入网设备。Wherein, since the SUPI of the camera 3 cannot be recognized by the access network device, the SUPI of the camera 3 needs to be converted into S-TMSI and then sent to the access network device.
1005、AMF通过N2会话流程告知接入网设备摄像头3的S-TMSI。1005. The AMF informs the access network device of the S-TMSI of the camera 3 through the N2 session process.
其中,摄像头3的S-TMSI可以携带在N2 PDU会话请求(N2 PDU session request)中。Among them, the S-TMSI of the camera 3 can be carried in the N2 PDU session request (N2 PDU session request).
1006、接入网设备执行RRC连接释放(release),告知摄像头3删除会话上下文。1006. The access network device executes RRC connection release (release), and informs the camera 3 to delete the session context.
1007、接入网设备对第一QoS流的QoS profile进行调整,并回收摄像头3的IP地址。1007. The access network device adjusts the QoS profile of the first QoS flow, and reclaims the IP address of the camera 3.
1008、接入网设备通过AMF向SMF发送摄像头3的IP地址。1008. The access network device sends the IP address of the camera 3 to the SMF through the AMF.
其中,接入网设备向AMF发送的摄像头3的IP地址可以携带在N2 PDU会话响 应(N2 PDU session response)中,AMF向SMF发送的摄像头3的IP地址可以携带在向SMF发送的PDU会话更新上下文(Nsmf_PDU session updateSMcontext)消息中。The IP address of the camera 3 sent by the access network device to the AMF can be carried in the N2 PDU session response (N2 PDU session response), and the IP address of the camera 3 sent by the AMF to the SMF can be carried in the PDU session update sent to the SMF. context (Nsmf_PDU session updateSMcontext) message.
1009、SMF通过N4会话流程告知UPF摄像头3的IP地址。1009. The SMF informs the UPF of the IP address of the camera 3 through the N4 session process.
其中,N4会话流程可以为N4 session modification流程。The N4 session process may be an N4 session modification process.
其中,接入网设备除了通过AMF和SMF向UPF发送摄像头3的IP地址之外,也可以直接向UPF发送摄像头3的IP地址。Wherein, in addition to sending the IP address of the camera 3 to the UPF through the AMF and the SMF, the access network device may also directly send the IP address of the camera 3 to the UPF.
1010、UPF对第一QoS流的PDR进行调整,并回收摄像头3的IP地址。1010 . The UPF adjusts the PDR of the first QoS flow, and reclaims the IP address of the camera 3 .
其中,UPF收到SMF提供的摄像头3的IP地址之后,会明确对应该IP地址的摄像头被删除。Among them, after receiving the IP address of camera 3 provided by SMF, UPF will make it clear that the camera corresponding to the IP address is deleted.
实施例7Example 7
实施例7对M个接入网设备为多个接入网设备的情况下,摄像头组中的摄像头(记为摄像头3)停止工作时,需要删除对应的会话上下文信息、释放RRC连接并进行QoS流的QoS调整,以下对这些过程进行示例性说明。Embodiment 7 In the case where the M access network devices are multiple access network devices, when the camera in the camera group (referred to as camera 3) stops working, it is necessary to delete the corresponding session context information, release the RRC connection and perform QoS. QoS adjustment of the flow, these processes are exemplified below.
参见图11,实施例7提供的方法包括:Referring to Figure 11, the method provided by Embodiment 7 includes:
1101-1103、与步骤1001至步骤1003分别相同。1101-1103 are the same as steps 1001 to 1003 respectively.
1104、AMF根据摄像头3的SUPI和摄像头3的会话上下文确定摄像头3接入的接入网设备和摄像头3的S-TMSI,同时回收摄像头3的IP地址。1104. The AMF determines the access network device connected to the camera 3 and the S-TMSI of the camera 3 according to the SUPI of the camera 3 and the session context of the camera 3, and reclaims the IP address of the camera 3 at the same time.
1105-1106、与步骤1005和步骤1006分别相同。1105-1106, which are the same as step 1005 and step 1006, respectively.
1107、接入网设备对第一QoS流的QoS profile进行调整。1107. The access network device adjusts the QoS profile of the first QoS flow.
1108、AMF向SMF发送摄像头3的IP地址。1108. The AMF sends the IP address of the camera 3 to the SMF.
1109-1110、与步骤1009和步骤1010分别相同。1109-1110 are the same as step 1009 and step 1010, respectively.
本申请摈弃原有的每个终端建立PDU会话的复杂信令交互方案,在终端组内首个终端建立会话过程中,核心网会直接为该终端组生成对应的会话上下文与IP地址集,并将会话上下文发送给接入网设备,后续终端组中的其他终端可以直接通过与接入网设备交互实现PDU会话的建立或者SR流程,将IP地址集发送给AMF(M>1时)或接入网设备(M=1时),以及UPF上,由接入网设备或AMF进行统一IP地址分配与管理,不再与核心网进行重复性交互与重复的QoS决策,从而确保后续终端组内的其他终端在会话建立或者SR流程中实现信令的极大简化,有效提升效率与资源利用率。This application abandons the original complex signaling interaction scheme for each terminal to establish a PDU session. In the process of establishing a session for the first terminal in a terminal group, the core network will directly generate the corresponding session context and IP address set for the terminal group, and Send the session context to the access network device, and other terminals in the subsequent terminal group can directly interact with the access network device to realize the establishment of the PDU session or the SR process, and send the IP address set to the AMF (when M>1) or the connection. On the network access device (when M=1), and on the UPF, the access network device or AMF performs unified IP address allocation and management, and no longer performs repeated interaction and repeated QoS decisions with the core network, so as to ensure that the subsequent terminal group In the session establishment or SR process, the signaling of other terminals is greatly simplified, which effectively improves the efficiency and resource utilization.
本申请实施例还提供了终端组内的终端停止工作场景下的会话修改方案,能够确保网络侧将停止工作或需要停止工作的终端删除,并能够及时进行面向该群组的QoS流的QoS调整,确保接入网设备(M=1时)或AMF(M>1时),以及UPF进行IP地址集更新。The embodiment of the present application also provides a session modification solution in a scenario where a terminal in a terminal group stops working, which can ensure that the network side deletes the terminal that has stopped working or needs to stop working, and can perform QoS adjustment for the QoS flow of the group in time , to ensure that the access network equipment (when M=1) or the AMF (when M>1), and the UPF update the IP address set.
本申请实施例描述的系统架构以及业务场景是为了更加清楚的说明本申请实施例的技术方案,并不构成对于本申请实施例提供的技术方案的限定。本领域普通技术人员可知,随着网络架构的演变和新业务场景的出现,本申请实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题,同样适用。The system architecture and service scenarios described in the embodiments of the present application are for the purpose of illustrating the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application more clearly, and do not constitute a limitation on the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application. Those of ordinary skill in the art know that with the evolution of the network architecture and the emergence of new service scenarios, the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application are also applicable to similar technical problems.
上述主要从方法的角度对本申请实施例的方案进行了介绍。可以理解的是,各个网元,例如,SMF、AMF、UPF、接入网设备、终端为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和软件模块中的至少一个。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文 中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。The solutions of the embodiments of the present application have been introduced above mainly from the perspective of methods. It can be understood that each network element, such as SMF, AMF, UPF, access network equipment, and terminal, includes at least one of corresponding hardware structures and software modules for performing each function in order to implement the above functions. Those skilled in the art should easily realize that the present application can be implemented in hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software with the units and algorithm steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein. Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each particular application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对SMF、AMF、UPF、接入网设备、终端进行功能单元的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能单元,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中对单元的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。In this embodiment of the present application, functional units may be divided for SMF, AMF, UPF, access network equipment, and terminals according to the foregoing method examples. For example, each functional unit may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be divided integrated in one processing unit. The above-mentioned integrated units may be implemented in the form of hardware, or may be implemented in the form of software functional units. It should be noted that the division of units in the embodiments of the present application is illustrative, and is only a logical function division, and other division methods may be used in actual implementation.
示例性的,图12示出了上述实施例中所涉及的通信装置(记为通信装置120)的一种可能的结构示意图,该通信装置120包括处理单元1201和通信单元1202。可选的,还包括存储单元1203。通信装置120可以用于示意上述实施例中的SMF、AMF、UPF、接入网设备、终端的结构。Exemplarily, FIG. 12 shows a possible schematic structural diagram of the communication device (referred to as the communication device 120 ) involved in the above-mentioned embodiment, where the communication device 120 includes a processing unit 1201 and a communication unit 1202 . Optionally, a storage unit 1203 is also included. The communication apparatus 120 may be used to illustrate the structures of the SMF, AMF, UPF, access network equipment, and terminal in the foregoing embodiments.
当图12所示的结构示意图用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的SMF的结构时,处理单元1201用于对SMF的动作进行控制管理,例如,处理单元1201用于执行图4中的403-408,图7中的703-708,图10中的1002、1003、1008和1009,图11中的1102、1103、1108和1109,和/或本申请实施例中所描述的其他过程中的SMF执行的动作。处理单元1201可以通过通信单元1202与其他网络实体通信,例如,与图4中的AMF通信。存储单元1203用于存储SMF的程序代码和数据。When the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 12 is used to illustrate the structure of the SMF involved in the above embodiment, the processing unit 1201 is used to control and manage the actions of the SMF, for example, the processing unit 1201 is used to execute 403- 408, 703-708 in Fig. 7, 1002, 1003, 1008 and 1009 in Fig. 10, 1102, 1103, 1108 and 1109 in Fig. 11, and/or SMF in other processes described in the examples of this application Action performed. The processing unit 1201 may communicate with other network entities through the communication unit 1202, for example, with the AMF in FIG. 4 . The storage unit 1203 is used to store program codes and data of the SMF.
当图12所示的结构示意图用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的AMF的结构时,处理单元1201用于对AMF的动作进行控制管理,例如,处理单元1201用于执行图2中的201-203,图3中的301-305,图4中的401-403、408和409,图6中的604,图7中的701-703、708-710、712,图8中的803-805,图9中的903-905、907,图10中的1003-1005、1008,图11中的1103-1105、1108,和/或本申请实施例中所描述的其他过程中的AMF执行的动作。处理单元1201可以通过通信单元1202与其他网络实体通信,例如,与图4中的SMF通信。存储单元1203用于存储AMF的程序代码和数据。When the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 12 is used to illustrate the structure of the AMF involved in the above embodiment, the processing unit 1201 is used to control and manage the actions of the AMF, for example, the processing unit 1201 is used to execute 201- 203, 301-305 in Fig. 3, 401-403, 408 and 409 in Fig. 4, 604 in Fig. 6, 701-703, 708-710, 712 in Fig. 7, 803-805 in Fig. 8, 903-905, 907 in FIG. 9, 1003-1005, 1008 in FIG. 10, 1103-1105, 1108 in FIG. 11, and/or actions performed by the AMF in other processes described in the embodiments of the present application. The processing unit 1201 may communicate with other network entities through the communication unit 1202, for example, with the SMF in FIG. 4 . The storage unit 1203 is used to store program codes and data of the AMF.
当图12所示的结构示意图用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的UPF的结构时,处理单元1201用于对UPF的动作进行控制管理,例如,处理单元1201用于执行图4中的407,图5中的505、506,图6中的607、608,图7中的707,图8中的809、810,图9中的910、911,图10中的1009、1010,图11中的1109、1110,和/或本申请实施例中所描述的其他过程中的UPF执行的动作。处理单元1201可以通过通信单元1202与其他网络实体通信,例如,与图4中的SMF通信。存储单元1203用于存储UPF的程序代码和数据。When the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 12 is used to illustrate the structure of the UPF involved in the above embodiment, the processing unit 1201 is used to control and manage the actions of the UPF. For example, the processing unit 1201 is used to execute 407 in FIG. 4 , 505, 506 in Figure 5, 607, 608 in Figure 6, 707 in Figure 7, 809, 810 in Figure 8, 910, 911 in Figure 9, 1009, 1010 in Figure 10, Figure 11 Actions performed by the UPF in 1109, 1110, and/or other processes described in the embodiments of this application. The processing unit 1201 may communicate with other network entities through the communication unit 1202, for example, with the SMF in FIG. 4 . The storage unit 1203 is used to store program codes and data of the UPF.
当图12所示的结构示意图用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的接入网设备的结构时,处理单元1201用于对接入网设备的动作进行控制管理,例如,处理单元1201用于执行图2中的203(此时,接入网设备为M个接入网设备中的任意一个接入网设备),图3中的301、304、305,图4中的401、409、410,图5中的501-505,图6中的601-607,图7中的701、710、711,图8中的801-803、805-809,图9中的901-903、905-910,图10中的1005-1008,图11中的1105-1107,和/或本申请实施例中所描述的其他过程中的接入网设备执行的动作。处理单元1201可以通过通信单元1202与其他网络实体通信,例如,与图4中的AMF通信。存储单 元1203用于存储接入网设备的程序代码和数据。When the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 12 is used to illustrate the structure of the access network equipment involved in the above embodiment, the processing unit 1201 is used to control and manage the actions of the access network equipment, for example, the processing unit 1201 is used to execute 203 in Fig. 2 (at this time, the access network device is any one of the M access network devices), 301, 304, 305 in Fig. 3, 401, 409, 410 in Fig. 4, 501-505 in Fig. 5, 601-607 in Fig. 6, 701, 710, 711 in Fig. 7, 801-803, 805-809 in Fig. 8, 901-903, 905-910 in Fig. 9, Actions performed by the access network device in 1005-1008 in FIG. 10, 1105-1107 in FIG. 11, and/or other processes described in the embodiments of this application. The processing unit 1201 may communicate with other network entities through the communication unit 1202, for example, with the AMF in FIG. 4 . The storage unit 1203 is used to store program codes and data of the access network equipment.
当图12所示的结构示意图用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的终端的结构时,处理单元1201用于对终端的动作进行控制管理,例如,处理单元1201用于执行图2中的202(此时,终端为终端A),图3中的301、304、305(此时,终端为摄像头),图4中的401、410(此时,终端为摄像头1),图5中的501、503(此时,终端为摄像头2),图6中的601、603(此时,终端为摄像头2),图7中的701、711(此时,终端为摄像头1),图8中的801、806、807(此时,终端为摄像头2),图9中的901、906(此时,终端为摄像头2),图10中的1006(此时,终端为摄像头3),图11中的1106(此时,终端为摄像头3),和/或本申请实施例中所描述的其他过程中的终端执行的动作。处理单元1201可以通过通信单元1202与其他网络实体通信,例如,与图4中的接入网设备通信。存储单元1203用于存储终端的程序代码和数据。When the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 12 is used to illustrate the structure of the terminal involved in the above embodiment, the processing unit 1201 is used to control and manage the actions of the terminal, for example, the processing unit 1201 is used to execute 202 ( At this time, the terminal is terminal A), 301, 304, 305 in FIG. 3 (at this time, the terminal is a camera), 401, 410 in FIG. 4 (at this time, the terminal is camera 1), 501, 501 in FIG. 503 (at this time, the terminal is camera 2), 601 and 603 in Figure 6 (at this time, the terminal is camera 2), 701 and 711 in Figure 7 (at this time, the terminal is camera 1), 801 in Figure 8 , 806, 807 (at this time, the terminal is camera 2), 901, 906 in Figure 9 (at this time, the terminal is camera 2), 1006 in Figure 10 (at this time, the terminal is camera 3), in Figure 11 1106 (at this time, the terminal is the camera 3), and/or an action performed by the terminal in other processes described in the embodiments of this application. The processing unit 1201 may communicate with other network entities through the communication unit 1202, for example, communicate with the access network device in FIG. 4 . The storage unit 1203 is used to store program codes and data of the terminal.
示例性的,通信装置120可以为一个设备也可以为芯片或芯片系统。Exemplarily, the communication apparatus 120 may be a device or a chip or a chip system.
当通信装置120为一个设备时,处理单元1201可以是处理器;通信单元1202可以是通信接口、收发器,或,输入接口和/或输出接口。可选地,收发器可以为收发电路。可选地,输入接口可以为输入电路,输出接口可以为输出电路。When the communication apparatus 120 is a device, the processing unit 1201 may be a processor; the communication unit 1202 may be a communication interface, a transceiver, or an input interface and/or an output interface. Optionally, the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit. Optionally, the input interface may be an input circuit, and the output interface may be an output circuit.
当通信装置120为芯片或芯片系统时,通信单元1202可以是该芯片或芯片系统上的通信接口、输入接口和/或输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等。处理单元1201可以是处理器、处理电路或逻辑电路等。When the communication device 120 is a chip or a chip system, the communication unit 1202 may be a communication interface, input interface and/or output interface, interface circuit, output circuit, input circuit, pin or related circuit, etc. on the chip or chip system. The processing unit 1201 may be a processor, a processing circuit, a logic circuit, or the like.
图12中的集成的单元如果以软件功能模块的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请实施例的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)或处理器(processor)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。存储计算机软件产品的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。The integrated units in FIG. 12 may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium if implemented in the form of software functional modules and sold or used as independent products. Based on this understanding, the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be embodied in the form of software products in essence, or the parts that contribute to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solutions, and the computer software products are stored in a storage The medium includes several instructions to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) or a processor (processor) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application. Storage media for storing computer software products include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), magnetic disk or CD, etc. that can store program codes medium.
本申请实施例还提供了一种通信装置的硬件结构示意图,参见图13或图14,该通信装置包括处理器1301,可选的,还包括与处理器1301连接的存储器1302。An embodiment of the present application also provides a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of a communication device, see FIG. 13 or FIG. 14 , the communication device includes a processor 1301 , and optionally, a memory 1302 connected to the processor 1301 .
处理器1301可以是一个通用中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU)、微处理器、特定应用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),或者一个或多个用于控制本申请方案程序执行的集成电路。处理器1301也可以包括多个CPU,并且处理器1301可以是一个单核(single-CPU)处理器,也可以是多核(multi-CPU)处理器。这里的处理器可以指一个或多个设备、电路或用于处理数据(例如计算机程序指令)的处理核。The processor 1301 may be a general-purpose central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more processors used to control the execution of the programs of the present application. integrated circuit. The processor 1301 may also include multiple CPUs, and the processor 1301 may be a single-core (single-CPU) processor or a multi-core (multi-CPU) processor. A processor herein may refer to one or more devices, circuits, or processing cores for processing data (eg, computer program instructions).
存储器1302可以是ROM或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备、RAM或者可存储信息和指令的其他类型的动态存储设备,也可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically erasable programmable read-only memory,EEPROM)、只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory,CD-ROM)或其他光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或者其他磁存储设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质,本 申请实施例对此不作任何限制。存储器1302可以是独立存在(此时,处理器可以位于通信装置外,也可以位于通信装置内),也可以和处理器1301集成在一起。其中,存储器1302中可以包含计算机程序代码。处理器1301用于执行存储器1302中存储的计算机程序代码,从而实现本申请实施例提供的方法。The memory 1302 can be a ROM or other type of static storage device that can store static information and instructions, a RAM or other type of dynamic storage device that can store information and instructions, or an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory. read-only memory, EEPROM), compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM) or other optical disc storage, optical disc storage (including compact disc, laser disc, optical disc, digital versatile disc, Blu-ray disc, etc.), magnetic disk A storage medium or other magnetic storage device, or any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer, is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. The memory 1302 may exist independently (in this case, the processor may be located outside the communication device, or may be located in the communication device), or may be integrated with the processor 1301 . Among them, the memory 1302 may contain computer program code. The processor 1301 is configured to execute the computer program codes stored in the memory 1302, so as to implement the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application.
在第一种可能的实现方式中,参见图13,通信装置还包括收发器1303。处理器1301、存储器1302和收发器1303通过总线相连接。收发器1303用于与其他设备或通信网络通信。可选的,收发器1303可以包括发射机和接收机。收发器1303中用于实现接收功能的器件可以视为接收机,接收机用于执行本申请实施例中的接收的步骤。收发器1303中用于实现发送功能的器件可以视为发射机,发射机用于执行本申请实施例中的发送的步骤。In a first possible implementation manner, referring to FIG. 13 , the communication apparatus further includes a transceiver 1303 . The processor 1301, the memory 1302 and the transceiver 1303 are connected by a bus. The transceiver 1303 is used to communicate with other devices or communication networks. Optionally, the transceiver 1303 may include a transmitter and a receiver. A device in the transceiver 1303 for implementing the receiving function may be regarded as a receiver, and the receiver is configured to perform the receiving steps in the embodiments of the present application. A device in the transceiver 1303 for implementing the sending function may be regarded as a transmitter, and the transmitter is used to perform the sending step in the embodiment of the present application.
基于第一种可能的实现方式,图13所示的结构示意图可以用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的SMF、AMF、UPF、接入网设备、终端的结构。Based on the first possible implementation manner, the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 13 may be used to illustrate the structures of the SMF, AMF, UPF, access network equipment, and terminal involved in the foregoing embodiment.
当图13所示的结构示意图用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的SMF的结构时,处理器1301用于对SMF的动作进行控制管理,例如,处理器1301用于执行图4中的403-408,图7中的703-708,图10中的1002、1003、1008和1009,图11中的1102、1103、1108和1109,和/或本申请实施例中所描述的其他过程中的SMF执行的动作。处理器1301可以通过收发器1303与其他网络实体通信,例如,与图4中的AMF通信。存储器1302用于存储SMF的程序代码和数据。When the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 13 is used to illustrate the structure of the SMF involved in the above embodiment, the processor 1301 is used to control and manage the actions of the SMF, for example, the processor 1301 is used to execute 403- 408, 703-708 in Fig. 7, 1002, 1003, 1008 and 1009 in Fig. 10, 1102, 1103, 1108 and 1109 in Fig. 11, and/or SMF in other processes described in the examples of this application Action performed. The processor 1301 may communicate with other network entities through the transceiver 1303, eg, with the AMF in FIG. 4 . Memory 1302 is used to store program codes and data for the SMF.
当图13所示的结构示意图用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的AMF的结构时,处理器1301用于对AMF的动作进行控制管理,例如,处理器1301用于执行图2中的201-203,图3中的301-305,图4中的401-403、408和409,图6中的604,图7中的701-703、708-710、712,图8中的803-805,图9中的903-905、907,图10中的1003-1005、1008,图11中的1103-1105、1108,和/或本申请实施例中所描述的其他过程中的AMF执行的动作。处理器1301可以通过收发器1303与其他网络实体通信,例如,与图4中的SMF通信。存储器1302用于存储AMF的程序代码和数据。When the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 13 is used to illustrate the structure of the AMF involved in the above embodiment, the processor 1301 is used to control and manage the actions of the AMF, for example, the processor 1301 is used to execute 201- 203, 301-305 in Fig. 3, 401-403, 408 and 409 in Fig. 4, 604 in Fig. 6, 701-703, 708-710, 712 in Fig. 7, 803-805 in Fig. 8, 903-905, 907 in FIG. 9, 1003-1005, 1008 in FIG. 10, 1103-1105, 1108 in FIG. 11, and/or actions performed by the AMF in other processes described in the embodiments of the present application. The processor 1301 may communicate with other network entities through the transceiver 1303, eg, with the SMF in FIG. 4 . The memory 1302 is used to store program codes and data of the AMF.
当图13所示的结构示意图用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的UPF的结构时,处理器1301用于对UPF的动作进行控制管理,例如,处理器1301用于执行图4中的407,图5中的505、506,图6中的607、608,图7中的707,图8中的809、810,图9中的910、911,图10中的1009、1010,图11中的1109、1110,和/或本申请实施例中所描述的其他过程中的UPF执行的动作。处理器1301可以通过收发器1303与其他网络实体通信,例如,与图4中的SMF通信。存储器1302用于存储UPF的程序代码和数据。When the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 13 is used to illustrate the structure of the UPF involved in the above embodiment, the processor 1301 is used to control and manage the actions of the UPF, for example, the processor 1301 is used to execute 407 in FIG. 4 , 505, 506 in Figure 5, 607, 608 in Figure 6, 707 in Figure 7, 809, 810 in Figure 8, 910, 911 in Figure 9, 1009, 1010 in Figure 10, Figure 11 Actions performed by the UPF in 1109, 1110, and/or other processes described in the embodiments of this application. The processor 1301 may communicate with other network entities through the transceiver 1303, eg, with the SMF in FIG. 4 . Memory 1302 is used to store program codes and data for the UPF.
当图13所示的结构示意图用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的接入网设备的结构时,处理器1301用于对接入网设备的动作进行控制管理,例如,处理器1301用于执行图2中的203(此时,接入网设备为M个接入网设备中的任意一个接入网设备),图3中的301、304、305,图4中的401、409、410,图5中的501-505,图6中的601-607,图7中的701、710、711,图8中的801-803、805-809,图9中的901-903、905-910,图10中的1005-1008,图11中的1105-1107,和/或本申请实施例中所描述的其他过程中的接入网设备执行的动作。处理器1301可以通过收发器1303与其他网络实体通信,例如,与图4中的AMF通信。存储器1302用于存储接入网设备的程序代码和数据。When the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 13 is used to illustrate the structure of the access network equipment involved in the above embodiment, the processor 1301 is used to control and manage the actions of the access network equipment, for example, the processor 1301 is used to execute 203 in Fig. 2 (at this time, the access network device is any one of the M access network devices), 301, 304, 305 in Fig. 3, 401, 409, 410 in Fig. 4, 501-505 in Fig. 5, 601-607 in Fig. 6, 701, 710, 711 in Fig. 7, 801-803, 805-809 in Fig. 8, 901-903, 905-910 in Fig. 9, Actions performed by the access network device in 1005-1008 in FIG. 10, 1105-1107 in FIG. 11, and/or other processes described in the embodiments of this application. The processor 1301 may communicate with other network entities through the transceiver 1303, eg, with the AMF in FIG. 4 . The memory 1302 is used to store program codes and data of the access network equipment.
当图13所示的结构示意图用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的终端的结构时,处理器1301 用于对终端的动作进行控制管理,例如,处理器1301用于执行图2中的202(此时,终端为终端A),图3中的301、304、305(此时,终端为摄像头),图4中的401、410(此时,终端为摄像头1),图5中的501、503(此时,终端为摄像头2),图6中的601、603(此时,终端为摄像头2),图7中的701、711(此时,终端为摄像头1),图8中的801、806、807(此时,终端为摄像头2),图9中的901、906(此时,终端为摄像头2),图10中的1006(此时,终端为摄像头3),图11中的1106(此时,终端为摄像头3),和/或本申请实施例中所描述的其他过程中的终端执行的动作。处理器1301可以通过收发器1303与其他网络实体通信,例如,与图4中的接入网设备通信。存储器1302用于存储终端的程序代码和数据。When the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 13 is used to illustrate the structure of the terminal involved in the above embodiment, the processor 1301 is used to control and manage the actions of the terminal, for example, the processor 1301 is used to execute 202 ( At this time, the terminal is terminal A), 301, 304, 305 in FIG. 3 (at this time, the terminal is a camera), 401, 410 in FIG. 4 (at this time, the terminal is camera 1), 501, 501 in FIG. 503 (at this time, the terminal is camera 2), 601 and 603 in Figure 6 (at this time, the terminal is camera 2), 701 and 711 in Figure 7 (at this time, the terminal is camera 1), 801 in Figure 8 , 806, 807 (at this time, the terminal is camera 2), 901, 906 in Figure 9 (at this time, the terminal is camera 2), 1006 in Figure 10 (at this time, the terminal is camera 3), in Figure 11 1106 (at this time, the terminal is the camera 3), and/or an action performed by the terminal in other processes described in the embodiments of this application. The processor 1301 may communicate with other network entities through the transceiver 1303, eg, with the access network device in FIG. 4 . The memory 1302 is used to store program codes and data of the terminal.
在第二种可能的实现方式中,处理器1301包括逻辑电路以及输入接口和输出接口中的至少一个。示例性的,输出接口用于执行相应方法中的发送的动作,输入接口用于执行相应方法中的接收的动作。In a second possible implementation, the processor 1301 includes a logic circuit and at least one of an input interface and an output interface. Exemplarily, the output interface is used for performing the sending action in the corresponding method, and the input interface is used for performing the receiving action in the corresponding method.
基于第二种可能的实现方式,参见图14,图14所示的结构示意图可以用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的SMF、AMF、UPF、接入网设备、终端的结构。Based on the second possible implementation manner, see FIG. 14 . The schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 14 may be used to illustrate the structures of the SMF, AMF, UPF, access network equipment, and terminal involved in the foregoing embodiment.
当图14所示的结构示意图用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的SMF的结构时,处理器1301用于对SMF的动作进行控制管理,例如,处理器1301用于执行图4中的403-408,图7中的703-708,图10中的1002、1003、1008和1009,图11中的1102、1103、1108和1109,和/或本申请实施例中所描述的其他过程中的SMF执行的动作。处理器1301可以通过输入接口和输出接口中的至少一个与其他网络实体通信,例如,与图4中的AMF通信。存储器1302用于存储SMF的程序代码和数据。When the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 14 is used to illustrate the structure of the SMF involved in the above embodiment, the processor 1301 is used to control and manage the actions of the SMF, for example, the processor 1301 is used to execute 403- 408, 703-708 in Fig. 7, 1002, 1003, 1008 and 1009 in Fig. 10, 1102, 1103, 1108 and 1109 in Fig. 11, and/or SMF in other processes described in the examples of this application Action performed. The processor 1301 may communicate with other network entities, eg, with the AMF in FIG. 4 , through at least one of an input interface and an output interface. Memory 1302 is used to store program codes and data for the SMF.
当图14所示的结构示意图用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的AMF的结构时,处理器1301用于对AMF的动作进行控制管理,例如,处理器1301用于执行图2中的201-203,图3中的301-305,图4中的401-403、408和409,图6中的604,图7中的701-703、708-710、712,图8中的803-805,图9中的903-905、907,图10中的1003-1005、1008,图11中的1103-1105、1108,和/或本申请实施例中所描述的其他过程中的AMF执行的动作。处理器1301可以通过输入接口和输出接口中的至少一个与其他网络实体通信,例如,与图4中的SMF通信。存储器1302用于存储AMF的程序代码和数据。When the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 14 is used to illustrate the structure of the AMF involved in the above embodiment, the processor 1301 is used to control and manage the actions of the AMF, for example, the processor 1301 is used to execute the steps 201- 203, 301-305 in Fig. 3, 401-403, 408 and 409 in Fig. 4, 604 in Fig. 6, 701-703, 708-710, 712 in Fig. 7, 803-805 in Fig. 8, 903-905, 907 in FIG. 9, 1003-1005, 1008 in FIG. 10, 1103-1105, 1108 in FIG. 11, and/or actions performed by the AMF in other processes described in the embodiments of the present application. The processor 1301 may communicate with other network entities, eg, with the SMF in FIG. 4 , through at least one of an input interface and an output interface. The memory 1302 is used to store program codes and data of the AMF.
当图14所示的结构示意图用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的UPF的结构时,处理器1301用于对UPF的动作进行控制管理,例如,处理器1301用于执行图4中的407,图5中的505、506,图6中的607、608,图7中的707,图8中的809、810,图9中的910、911,图10中的1009、1010,图11中的1109、1110,和/或本申请实施例中所描述的其他过程中的UPF执行的动作。处理器1301可以通过输入接口和输出接口中的至少一个与其他网络实体通信,例如,与图4中的SMF通信。存储器1302用于存储UPF的程序代码和数据。When the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 14 is used to illustrate the structure of the UPF involved in the above embodiment, the processor 1301 is used to control and manage the actions of the UPF, for example, the processor 1301 is used to execute 407 in FIG. 4 , 505, 506 in Figure 5, 607, 608 in Figure 6, 707 in Figure 7, 809, 810 in Figure 8, 910, 911 in Figure 9, 1009, 1010 in Figure 10, Figure 11 Actions performed by the UPF in 1109, 1110, and/or other processes described in the embodiments of this application. The processor 1301 may communicate with other network entities, eg, with the SMF in FIG. 4 , through at least one of an input interface and an output interface. Memory 1302 is used to store program codes and data for the UPF.
当图14所示的结构示意图用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的接入网设备的结构时,处理器1301用于对接入网设备的动作进行控制管理,例如,处理器1301用于执行图2中的203(此时,接入网设备为M个接入网设备中的任意一个接入网设备),图3中的301、304、305,图4中的401、409、410,图5中的501-505,图6中的601-607,图7中的701、710、711,图8中的801-803、805-809,图9中的901-903、905-910,图10中的1005-1008,图11中的1105-1107,和/或本申请实施例中所描述的其他过程中的接入网设备执行的动作。处理器1301可以通过输入接口和输出接口中的至少一个与其他网络实体通信,例如,与图4中的AMF通信。存 储器1302用于存储接入网设备的程序代码和数据。When the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 14 is used to illustrate the structure of the access network equipment involved in the above embodiment, the processor 1301 is used to control and manage the actions of the access network equipment, for example, the processor 1301 is used to execute 203 in Fig. 2 (at this time, the access network device is any one of the M access network devices), 301, 304, 305 in Fig. 3, 401, 409, 410 in Fig. 4, 501-505 in Fig. 5, 601-607 in Fig. 6, 701, 710, 711 in Fig. 7, 801-803, 805-809 in Fig. 8, 901-903, 905-910 in Fig. 9, Actions performed by the access network device in 1005-1008 in FIG. 10, 1105-1107 in FIG. 11, and/or other processes described in the embodiments of this application. The processor 1301 may communicate with other network entities, eg, with the AMF in FIG. 4 , through at least one of an input interface and an output interface. The memory 1302 is used to store program codes and data of the access network equipment.
当图14所示的结构示意图用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的终端的结构时,处理器1301用于对终端的动作进行控制管理,例如,处理器1301用于执行图2中的202(此时,终端为终端A),图3中的301、304、305(此时,终端为摄像头),图4中的401、410(此时,终端为摄像头1),图5中的501、503(此时,终端为摄像头2),图6中的601、603(此时,终端为摄像头2),图7中的701、711(此时,终端为摄像头1),图8中的801、806、807(此时,终端为摄像头2),图9中的901、906(此时,终端为摄像头2),图10中的1006(此时,终端为摄像头3),图11中的1106(此时,终端为摄像头3),和/或本申请实施例中所描述的其他过程中的终端执行的动作。处理器1301可以通过输入接口和输出接口中的至少一个与其他网络实体通信,例如,与图4中的接入网设备通信。存储器1302用于存储终端的程序代码和数据。When the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 14 is used to illustrate the structure of the terminal involved in the above embodiment, the processor 1301 is used to control and manage the actions of the terminal, for example, the processor 1301 is used to execute 202 ( At this time, the terminal is terminal A), 301, 304, 305 in FIG. 3 (at this time, the terminal is a camera), 401, 410 in FIG. 4 (at this time, the terminal is camera 1), 501, 501 in FIG. 503 (at this time, the terminal is camera 2), 601 and 603 in Figure 6 (at this time, the terminal is camera 2), 701 and 711 in Figure 7 (at this time, the terminal is camera 1), 801 in Figure 8 , 806, 807 (at this time, the terminal is camera 2), 901, 906 in Figure 9 (at this time, the terminal is camera 2), 1006 in Figure 10 (at this time, the terminal is camera 3), in Figure 11 1106 (at this time, the terminal is the camera 3), and/or an action performed by the terminal in other processes described in the embodiments of this application. The processor 1301 may communicate with other network entities, eg, with the access network device in FIG. 4 , through at least one of an input interface and an output interface. The memory 1302 is used to store program codes and data of the terminal.
在实现过程中,本实施例提供的方法中的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。In the implementation process, each step in the method provided in this embodiment may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in a processor or an instruction in the form of software. The steps of the methods disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as executed by a hardware processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,包括指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述任一方法。Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer-readable storage medium, including instructions, which, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to execute any of the foregoing methods.
本申请实施例还提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述任一方法。Embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product containing instructions, which, when run on a computer, enables the computer to execute any of the above methods.
本申请实施例还提供了一种通信系统,包括:SMF、AMF、UPF、接入网设备和终端中的任意一个或多个。An embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, including: any one or more of SMF, AMF, UPF, access network equipment, and terminals.
本申请实施例还提供了一种芯片,包括:处理器和接口,处理器通过接口与存储器耦合,当处理器执行存储器中的计算机程序或指令时,使得上述实施例提供的任意一种方法被执行。An embodiment of the present application further provides a chip, including: a processor and an interface, where the processor is coupled to a memory through the interface, and when the processor executes a computer program or instruction in the memory, any one of the methods provided in the above embodiments is executed by the processor. implement.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件程序实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式来实现。该计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或者数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可以用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带),光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state disk,SSD))等。In the above-mentioned embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. When implemented using a software program, it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, all or part of the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated. The computer may be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. Computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website site, computer, server, or data center over a wire (e.g. coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (eg infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means to transmit to another website site, computer, server or data center. Computer-readable storage media can be any available media that can be accessed by a computer or data storage devices including one or more servers, data centers, etc., that can be integrated with the media. Useful media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (eg, DVDs), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state disks (SSDs)), and the like.
尽管在此结合各实施例对本申请进行了描述,然而,在实施所要求保护的本申请过程中,本领域技术人员通过查看附图、公开内容、以及所附权利要求书,可理解并实现公开实施例的其他变化。在权利要求中,“包括”(comprising)一词不排除其他组成部分或步骤,“一”或“一个”不排除多个的情况。单个处理器或其他单元可以实现权利要求中列举的若干 项功能。相互不同的从属权利要求中记载了某些措施,但这并不表示这些措施不能组合起来产生良好的效果。Although the application is described herein in conjunction with various embodiments, in practicing the claimed application, those skilled in the art can understand and implement the disclosure by reviewing the drawings, the disclosure, and the appended claims Other variations of the embodiment. In the claims, the word "comprising" does not exclude other components or steps, and "a" or "an" does not exclude a plurality. A single processor or other unit may fulfill the functions of several items recited in the claims. The mere fact that certain measures are recited in mutually different dependent claims does not indicate that these measures cannot be combined to advantage.
尽管结合具体特征及其实施例对本申请进行了描述,显而易见的,在不脱离本申请的精神和范围的情况下,可对其进行各种修改和组合。相应地,本说明书和附图仅仅是所附权利要求所界定的本申请的示例性说明,且视为已覆盖本申请范围内的任意和所有修改、变化、组合或等同物。显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的精神和范围。这样,倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。Although the application has been described in conjunction with specific features and embodiments thereof, it will be apparent that various modifications and combinations can be made therein without departing from the spirit and scope of the application. Accordingly, this specification and drawings are merely exemplary illustrations of the application as defined by the appended claims, and are deemed to cover any and all modifications, variations, combinations or equivalents within the scope of this application. Obviously, those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the present application without departing from the spirit and scope of the present application. Thus, if these modifications and variations of the present application fall within the scope of the claims of the present application and their equivalents, the present application is also intended to include these modifications and variations.

Claims (31)

  1. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising:
    接入网设备从移动管理网元接收终端组的会话上下文和所述终端组的标识,所述终端组中的终端的业务具有相同的服务质量QoS需求;The access network device receives the session context of the terminal group and the identifier of the terminal group from the mobility management network element, and the services of the terminals in the terminal group have the same QoS requirements;
    所述接入网设备从所述终端组中的第一终端接收第一消息,所述第一消息中包括所述终端组的标识,所述接入网设备为所述第一终端接入的接入网设备;The access network device receives a first message from a first terminal in the terminal group, where the first message includes an identifier of the terminal group, and the access network device is an access network device accessed by the first terminal. access network equipment;
    所述接入网设备根据所述第一消息向所述第一终端发送第一响应,所述第一响应中携带所述终端组的会话上下文。The access network device sends a first response to the first terminal according to the first message, where the first response carries the session context of the terminal group.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接入网设备从移动管理网元接收终端组的会话上下文,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the access network device receives the session context of the terminal group from the mobility management network element, comprising:
    在所述终端组中的第二终端建立会话的过程中,所述接入网设备从所述移动管理网元接收所述终端组的会话上下文和所述终端组的标识,所述第二终端为所述终端组中的首个请求建立会话的终端。In the process of establishing a session by a second terminal in the terminal group, the access network device receives the session context of the terminal group and the identifier of the terminal group from the mobility management network element, and the second terminal The first terminal in the terminal group to request the establishment of a session.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接入网设备从所述终端组中的第一终端接收第一消息,包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the access network device receives the first message from the first terminal in the terminal group, comprising:
    在所述第一终端的会话建立过程中或服务请求过程中,所述接入网设备从所述第一终端接收所述第一消息。During a session establishment process or a service request process of the first terminal, the access network device receives the first message from the first terminal.
  4. 根据权利要求1-3任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端组中的终端接入M个接入网设备,M=1,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-3, wherein the terminals in the terminal group access M access network devices, M=1, and the method further comprises:
    所述接入网设备从所述移动管理网元接收互联网协议IP地址集;receiving, by the access network device, an Internet Protocol IP address set from the mobility management network element;
    所述接入网设备根据所述IP地址集为所述第一终端分配IP地址;assigning, by the access network device, an IP address to the first terminal according to the IP address set;
    所述接入网设备向所述第一终端发送为所述第一终端分配的IP地址。The access network device sends the IP address allocated for the first terminal to the first terminal.
  5. 根据权利要求1-3任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述终端组中的终端接入M个接入网设备,M>1,M为整数,所述接入网设备为所述M个接入网设备中的一个,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-3, wherein the terminals in the terminal group access M access network devices, where M>1, M is an integer, and the access network devices are all access network devices. One of the M access network devices, the method further includes:
    所述接入网设备向所述移动管理网元发送IP地址请求,所述IP地址请求用于为所述第一终端请求IP地址;sending, by the access network device, an IP address request to the mobility management network element, where the IP address request is used to request an IP address for the first terminal;
    所述接入网设备从所述移动管理网元接收所述移动管理网元为所述第一终端分配的IP地址;receiving, by the access network device, the IP address allocated by the mobility management network element for the first terminal from the mobility management network element;
    所述接入网设备向所述第一终端发送所述移动管理网元为所述第一终端分配的IP地址。The access network device sends, to the first terminal, the IP address allocated by the mobility management network element for the first terminal.
  6. 根据权利要求1-5任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-5, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述接入网设备向为所述接入网设备提供服务的用户面网元发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述用户面网元所述第一终端加入第一会话,所述终端组中的终端共用所述第一会话中的一个QoS流,或者,所述终端组中的接入所述接入网设备的终端共用所述第一会话中的一个QoS流。The access network device sends second indication information to the user plane network element that provides services for the access network device, where the second indication information is used to instruct the user plane network element and the first terminal to join the first terminal. session, the terminals in the terminal group share one QoS flow in the first session, or the terminals in the terminal group accessing the access network device share one QoS flow in the first session .
  7. 根据权利要求1-6任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述终端组中的、接入所述接入网设备的第三终端停止工作的情况下,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-6, wherein, in the case that a third terminal in the terminal group that accesses the access network device stops working, the method further comprises:
    所述接入网设备向为所述接入网设备提供服务的用户面网元发送第六指示信息和 第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述用户面网元所述第三终端离开第一会话,所述第六指示信息用于指示所述第三终端的IP地址,所述终端组中的终端共用所述第一会话中的一个QoS流,或者,所述终端组中的接入所述接入网设备的终端共用所述第一会话中的一个QoS流。The access network device sends sixth indication information and fourth indication information to the user plane network element that provides services for the access network device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the user plane network element that the first indication information is Three terminals leave the first session, the sixth indication information is used to indicate the IP address of the third terminal, the terminals in the terminal group share one QoS flow in the first session, or the terminal group The terminals accessing the access network device in the shared one QoS flow in the first session.
  8. 根据权利要求1-7任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述终端组中的、接入所述接入网设备的第三终端停止工作的情况下,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-7, wherein, in the case that a third terminal in the terminal group that accesses the access network device stops working, the method further comprises:
    所述接入网设备从所述移动管理网元接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第三终端停止工作;receiving, by the access network device, third indication information from the mobility management network element, where the third indication information is used to instruct the third terminal to stop working;
    所述接入网设备释放与所述第三终端之间的连接。The access network device releases the connection with the third terminal.
  9. 根据权利要求6或7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 6 or 7, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述接入网设备根据所述终端组中的当前接入所述接入网设备的终端个数和所述终端组的会话上下文,对所述QoS流的QoS配置文件进行调整。The access network device adjusts the QoS configuration file of the QoS flow according to the number of terminals in the terminal group currently accessing the access network device and the session context of the terminal group.
  10. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising:
    在终端的注册过程中,移动管理网元判断所述终端所属的终端组的会话上下文是否下发给接入网设备,所述接入网设备为所述终端接入的接入网设备,所述终端组中的终端的业务具有相同的服务质量QoS需求;During the registration process of the terminal, the mobility management network element judges whether the session context of the terminal group to which the terminal belongs is delivered to the access network device, and the access network device is the access network device accessed by the terminal. The services of the terminals in the terminal group have the same quality of service QoS requirements;
    若是,所述移动管理网元向所述终端发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述终端向所述接入网设备获取会话上下文;If so, the mobility management network element sends first indication information to the terminal, where the first indication information is used to instruct the terminal to obtain a session context from the access network device;
    若否,在所述终端建立会话的过程中,所述移动管理网元向M个接入网设备发送所述终端组的会话上下文和所述终端组的标识,所述M个接入网设备为所述终端组中的终端接入的接入网设备,所述M个接入网设备包括所述终端接入的接入网设备,M为大于0的整数。If not, in the process of establishing a session by the terminal, the mobility management network element sends the session context of the terminal group and the identifier of the terminal group to the M access network devices, and the M access network devices is an access network device accessed by a terminal in the terminal group, the M access network devices include access network devices accessed by the terminal, and M is an integer greater than 0.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息具体用于指示所述终端在会话建立过程中或服务请求过程中向所述接入网设备获取会话上下文。The method according to claim 10, wherein the first indication information is specifically used to instruct the terminal to obtain a session context from the access network device in a session establishment process or a service request process.
  12. 根据权利要求10或11所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述终端建立会话的过程中,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 10 or 11, wherein in the process of establishing the session by the terminal, the method further comprises:
    所述移动管理网元从所述终端接收第二消息,所述第二消息用于请求为所述终端建立会话;receiving, by the mobility management network element, a second message from the terminal, where the second message is used to request the establishment of a session for the terminal;
    所述移动管理网元确定所述终端为所述终端组中的首个请求建立会话的终端;The mobility management network element determines that the terminal is the first terminal in the terminal group that requests to establish a session;
    所述移动管理网元向会话管理网元发送第三消息,所述第三消息中携带所述终端组的标识,所述第三消息用于请求所述终端组的会话上下文;The mobility management network element sends a third message to the session management network element, where the third message carries the identifier of the terminal group, and the third message is used to request the session context of the terminal group;
    所述移动管理网元从所述会话管理网元接收所述终端组的会话上下文。The mobility management network element receives the session context of the terminal group from the session management network element.
  13. 根据权利要求10-12任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述终端建立会话的过程中,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 10-12, wherein in the process of establishing a session by the terminal, the method further comprises:
    所述移动管理网元从会话管理网元接收互联网协议IP地址集,所述IP地址集用于所述终端组中的终端的IP地址的分配。The mobility management network element receives an Internet Protocol IP address set from the session management network element, the IP address set being used for assignment of IP addresses of terminals in the terminal group.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,若M=1,在所述终端建立会话的过程中,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 13, wherein if M=1, in the process of establishing the session by the terminal, the method further comprises:
    所述移动管理网元向所述接入网设备发送所述IP地址集。The mobility management network element sends the IP address set to the access network device.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述终端组中的第三终端停止工作的情况下,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 14, wherein in the case that the third terminal in the terminal group stops working, the method further comprises:
    所述移动管理网元接收来自于所述M个接入网设备的第六指示信息,所述第六指示信息用于指示所述第三终端的IP地址;receiving, by the mobility management network element, sixth indication information from the M access network devices, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate the IP address of the third terminal;
    所述移动管理网元通过所述会话管理网元向为所述M个接入网设备服务的用户面网元发送第四指示信息和所述第六指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述用户面网元所述第三终端离开第一会话;The mobility management network element sends fourth indication information and the sixth indication information to the user plane network element serving the M access network devices through the session management network element, where the fourth indication information is used for instructing the user plane network element, the third terminal, to leave the first session;
    其中,所述终端组中的终端共用所述第一会话中的一个QoS流,或者,所述终端组中的接入同一个接入网设备的终端共用所述第一会话中的一个QoS流。The terminals in the terminal group share one QoS flow in the first session, or the terminals in the terminal group accessing the same access network device share one QoS flow in the first session .
  16. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,M>1,在所述终端建立会话的过程中,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 13, wherein M>1, in the process of establishing a session by the terminal, the method further comprises:
    所述移动管理网元从所述终端接入的接入网设备接收IP地址请求,所述IP地址请求用于为所述终端请求IP地址;receiving, by the mobility management network element, an IP address request from an access network device accessed by the terminal, where the IP address request is used to request an IP address for the terminal;
    所述移动管理网元根据所述IP地址集为所述终端分配IP地址;The mobility management network element allocates an IP address to the terminal according to the IP address set;
    所述移动管理网元向所述终端接入的接入网设备发送为所述终端分配的IP地址。The mobility management network element sends the IP address allocated for the terminal to the access network device accessed by the terminal.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述终端组中的第三终端停止工作的情况下,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 16, wherein in the case that the third terminal in the terminal group stops working, the method further comprises:
    所述移动管理网元回收所述第三终端的IP地址;The mobility management network element reclaims the IP address of the third terminal;
    所述移动管理网元通过所述会话管理网元向为所述第三终端接入的接入网设备服务的用户面网元发送第四指示信息和第六指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述用户面网元所述第三终端离开第一会话,所述第六指示信息用于指示所述第三终端的IP地址;The mobility management network element sends fourth indication information and sixth indication information to the user plane network element serving the access network device accessed by the third terminal through the session management network element, and the fourth indication information is used to instruct the user plane network element, the third terminal, to leave the first session, and the sixth indication information is used to indicate the IP address of the third terminal;
    其中,所述终端组中的终端共用所述第一会话中的一个QoS流,或者,所述终端组中的接入同一个接入网设备的终端共用所述第一会话中的一个QoS流。The terminals in the terminal group share one QoS flow in the first session, or the terminals in the terminal group accessing the same access network device share one QoS flow in the first session .
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 17, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述移动管理网元根据所述第三终端的上下文获取所述第三终端接入的接入网设备的标识和所述第三终端的标识;obtaining, by the mobility management network element, the identity of the access network device accessed by the third terminal and the identity of the third terminal according to the context of the third terminal;
    所述移动管理网元向所述第三终端接入的接入网设备发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第三终端停止工作。The mobility management network element sends third indication information to the access network device accessed by the third terminal, where the third indication information is used to instruct the third terminal to stop working.
  19. 根据权利要求10-18任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述终端建立会话的过程中,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 10-18, wherein in the process of establishing a session by the terminal, the method further comprises:
    所述移动管理网元从所述M个接入网设备接收所述M个接入网设备的隧道信息;receiving, by the mobility management network element, the tunnel information of the M access network devices from the M access network devices;
    所述移动管理网元向会话管理网元发送所述M个接入网设备的隧道信息。The mobility management network element sends the tunnel information of the M access network devices to the session management network element.
  20. 根据权利要求10-19任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述终端建立会话的过程中,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 10-19, wherein in the process of establishing a session by the terminal, the method further comprises:
    所述移动管理网元向所述终端发送所述终端的会话上下文。The mobility management network element sends the terminal's session context to the terminal.
  21. 根据权利要求10-20任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述移动管理网元根据所述终端的标识确定所述终端所属的终端组,包括:The method according to any one of claims 10-20, wherein the mobility management network element determines the terminal group to which the terminal belongs according to the identifier of the terminal, comprising:
    所述移动管理网元根据所述终端的标识从数据管理网元获取所述终端的签约信息, 所述签约信息中包括所述终端所属的终端组的信息。The mobility management network element acquires the subscription information of the terminal from the data management network element according to the identifier of the terminal, where the subscription information includes information of a terminal group to which the terminal belongs.
  22. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising:
    终端在注册过程中从移动管理网元接收第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述终端向接入的接入网设备获取会话上下文,所述终端属于终端组,所述终端组中的终端的业务具有相同的服务质量QoS需求;The terminal receives first indication information from the mobility management network element during the registration process, where the first indication information is used to instruct the terminal to obtain a session context from the access network device that is accessed, the terminal belongs to a terminal group, and the terminal The services of the terminals in the group have the same quality of service QoS requirements;
    所述终端根据所述第一指示信息向所述接入网设备发送第一消息,所述第一消息中包括所述终端组的标识;sending, by the terminal, a first message to the access network device according to the first indication information, where the first message includes the identifier of the terminal group;
    所述终端从所述接入网设备接收第一响应,所述第一响应中携带所述终端组的会话上下文。The terminal receives a first response from the access network device, where the first response carries the session context of the terminal group.
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息具体用于指示所述终端在会话建立过程中或服务请求过程中向所述接入网设备获取会话上下文,所述终端根据所述第一指示信息向所述接入网设备发送第一消息,包括:The method according to claim 22, wherein the first indication information is specifically used to instruct the terminal to obtain a session context from the access network device in a session establishment process or a service request process, and the terminal Sending a first message to the access network device according to the first indication information includes:
    所述终端根据所述第一指示信息,在会话建立过程中或服务请求过程中向所述接入网设备发送所述第一消息。The terminal sends the first message to the access network device in a session establishment process or a service request process according to the first indication information.
  24. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising:
    会话管理网元从移动管理网元接收第二终端的第三消息,所述第二终端为终端组中的首个请求建立会话的终端,所述终端组中的终端的业务具有相同的服务质量QoS需求,所述第三消息中携带所述终端组的标识,所述第三消息用于请求所述终端组的会话上下文;The session management network element receives the third message of the second terminal from the mobility management network element, where the second terminal is the first terminal in the terminal group that requests to establish a session, and the services of the terminals in the terminal group have the same quality of service QoS requirements, the third message carries the identifier of the terminal group, and the third message is used to request the session context of the terminal group;
    所述会话管理网元根据所述终端组的标识创建所述终端组的会话上下文;The session management network element creates a session context of the terminal group according to the identifier of the terminal group;
    所述会话管理网元向所述移动管理网元发送所述终端组的会话上下文。The session management network element sends the session context of the terminal group to the mobility management network element.
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 24, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述会话管理网元为所述终端组分配互联网协议IP地址集,并向所述移动管理网元发送所述IP地址集,所述IP地址集用于所述终端组中的终端的IP地址的分配。The session management network element allocates an Internet Protocol IP address set to the terminal group, and sends the IP address set to the mobility management network element, where the IP address set is used for the IP addresses of the terminals in the terminal group allocation.
  26. 根据权利要求24或25所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述会话管理网元向所述移动管理网元发送所述终端组的会话上下文之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 24 or 25, wherein before the session management network element sends the session context of the terminal group to the mobility management network element, the method further comprises:
    所述会话管理网元向策略控制网元发送第五指示信息,所述第五指示信息用于指示所述策略控制网元为所述终端组制定对应的策略与计费控制PCC规则;The session management network element sends fifth indication information to the policy control network element, where the fifth indication information is used to instruct the policy control network element to formulate a corresponding policy and charging control PCC rule for the terminal group;
    所述会话管理网元从所述策略控制网元接收所述策略控制网元为所述终端组制定的PCC规则;receiving, by the session management network element, the PCC rule formulated by the policy control network element for the terminal group from the policy control network element;
    所述会话管理网元根据所述PCC规则生成所述终端组的会话上下文中的QoS规则。The session management network element generates a QoS rule in the session context of the terminal group according to the PCC rule.
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 26, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述会话管理网元根据所述PCC规则生成为所述第二终端接入的接入网设备服务的用户面网元对应的包检测规则PDR;The session management network element generates, according to the PCC rule, a packet detection rule PDR corresponding to the user plane network element serving the access network device accessed by the second terminal;
    所述会话管理网元向所述用户面网元发送IP地址集和所述用户面网元对应的PDR。The session management network element sends an IP address set and a PDR corresponding to the user plane network element to the user plane network element.
  28. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, comprising:
    用户面网元从会话管理网元接收互联网协议IP地址集,所述IP地址集用于终端 组中的终端的IP地址的分配,所述终端组中的终端的业务具有相同的服务质量QoS需求,所述终端组中的终端共用第一会话中的一个QoS流,或者,所述终端组中的接入同一个接入网设备的终端共用所述第一会话中的一个QoS流;The user plane network element receives the Internet Protocol IP address set from the session management network element, the IP address set is used for the allocation of IP addresses of the terminals in the terminal group, and the services of the terminals in the terminal group have the same service quality QoS requirements , the terminals in the terminal group share one QoS flow in the first session, or, the terminals in the terminal group that access the same access network device share one QoS flow in the first session;
    所述用户面网元接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述用户面网元第一终端加入所述第一会话,所述用户面网元将所述第一终端与所述IP地址集中的IP地址绑定;或者,所述用户面网元接收第六指示信息和第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述用户面网元第三终端离开所述第一会话,所述第六指示信息用于指示所述第三终端的IP地址,所述用户面网元根据所述第四指示信息和所述第六指示信息回收所述第三终端的IP地址。The user plane network element receives second indication information, where the second indication information is used to instruct the user plane network element of the first terminal to join the first session, and the user plane network element associates the first terminal with the first session. The IP addresses in the IP address set are bound; or, the user plane network element receives sixth indication information and fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to instruct the user plane network element for the third terminal to leave the location. the first session, the sixth indication information is used to indicate the IP address of the third terminal, and the user plane network element reclaims the third terminal's IP address according to the fourth indication information and the sixth indication information IP address.
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 28, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述用户面网元从所述会话管理网元接收所述用户面网元对应的包检测规则PDR,所述PDR根据为所述终端组制定的策略与计费控制PCC规则生成;The user plane network element receives the packet detection rule PDR corresponding to the user plane network element from the session management network element, and the PDR is generated according to the policy and charging control PCC rule formulated for the terminal group;
    所述用户面网元根据所述第二指示信息或所述第四指示信息调整所述PDR。The user plane network element adjusts the PDR according to the second indication information or the fourth indication information.
  30. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:一个或多个功能单元,所述一个或多个功能单元用于执行如权利要求1-9任一项所述的通信方法,或者,用于执行如权利要求10-21任一项所述的通信方法,或者,用于执行如权利要求22或23所述的通信方法,或者,用于执行如权利要求24-27任一项所述的通信方法,或者,用于执行如权利要求28或29所述的通信方法。A communication device, characterized in that it includes: one or more functional units, wherein the one or more functional units are used to execute the communication method according to any one of claims 1-9, or, to execute the communication method as claimed in any one of claims 1-9 The communication method according to any one of claims 10-21, or, for executing the communication method according to any one of claims 22 or 23, or, for executing the communication method according to any one of claims 24-27 , or, for performing the communication method as claimed in claim 28 or 29.
  31. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:处理器,所述处理器与存储器耦合,所述处理器用于执行如权利要求1-9任一项所述的通信方法,或者,用于执行如权利要求10-21任一项所述的通信方法,或者,用于执行如权利要求22或23所述的通信方法,或者,用于执行如权利要求24-27任一项所述的通信方法,或者,用于执行如权利要求28或29所述的通信方法。A communication device, comprising: a processor, wherein the processor is coupled to a memory, and the processor is configured to execute the communication method according to any one of claims 1-9, or to execute the communication method according to claim 1. The communication method according to any one of claims 10-21, or, for executing the communication method according to any one of claims 22 or 23, or, for executing the communication method according to any one of claims 24-27, Or, for performing the communication method as claimed in claim 28 or 29.
PCT/CN2021/101627 2020-06-30 2021-06-22 Communication method and apparatus WO2022001761A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202010617172.9 2020-06-30
CN202010617172.9A CN113873478B (en) 2020-06-30 2020-06-30 Communication method and device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022001761A1 true WO2022001761A1 (en) 2022-01-06

Family

ID=78981522

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/101627 WO2022001761A1 (en) 2020-06-30 2021-06-22 Communication method and apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN113873478B (en)
WO (1) WO2022001761A1 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114679436A (en) * 2022-05-27 2022-06-28 武汉中科通达高新技术股份有限公司 Session management method, server and computer readable storage medium
WO2024026892A1 (en) * 2022-08-05 2024-02-08 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Device sensing capability registration method and apparatus, and device sensing application method and apparatus
WO2024065139A1 (en) * 2022-09-26 2024-04-04 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Auxiliary operation method and apparatus

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114363975A (en) * 2022-01-17 2022-04-15 北京艾灵客科技有限公司 Data communication method, device, electronic equipment and storage medium
CN116567742A (en) * 2022-01-30 2023-08-08 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and device

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101170749A (en) * 2007-12-05 2008-04-30 华为技术有限公司 A method for realizing differential service in WAP group and WAP gateway
CN102595489A (en) * 2011-01-10 2012-07-18 华为技术有限公司 Method, service gateway and AAA server for obtaining quality of service
CN106658480A (en) * 2016-12-30 2017-05-10 上海顶竹通讯技术有限公司 Terminal communication method and system
US20190261260A1 (en) * 2018-02-17 2019-08-22 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. System and method for ue context and pdu session context management

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101170749A (en) * 2007-12-05 2008-04-30 华为技术有限公司 A method for realizing differential service in WAP group and WAP gateway
CN102595489A (en) * 2011-01-10 2012-07-18 华为技术有限公司 Method, service gateway and AAA server for obtaining quality of service
CN106658480A (en) * 2016-12-30 2017-05-10 上海顶竹通讯技术有限公司 Terminal communication method and system
US20190261260A1 (en) * 2018-02-17 2019-08-22 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. System and method for ue context and pdu session context management

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
SAMSUNG: "KI#1, solution#6: update on MBS Service initiation procedure", 3GPP DRAFT; S2-2003901, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. SA WG2, no. Elbonia; 20200601 - 20200612, 22 May 2020 (2020-05-22), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051889909 *

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114679436A (en) * 2022-05-27 2022-06-28 武汉中科通达高新技术股份有限公司 Session management method, server and computer readable storage medium
CN114679436B (en) * 2022-05-27 2022-08-30 武汉中科通达高新技术股份有限公司 Session management method, server and computer readable storage medium
WO2024026892A1 (en) * 2022-08-05 2024-02-08 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Device sensing capability registration method and apparatus, and device sensing application method and apparatus
WO2024065139A1 (en) * 2022-09-26 2024-04-04 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Auxiliary operation method and apparatus

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN113873478B (en) 2024-04-23
CN113873478A (en) 2021-12-31

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2022001761A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
US9173244B2 (en) Methods for establishing and using public path, M2M communication method, and systems thereof
EP2903381B1 (en) Radio resource adjusting method and device
WO2019158010A1 (en) Resource management method, device and system
WO2019184651A1 (en) Communication method and device
WO2019228214A1 (en) Method and apparatus for establishing radio bearer and monitoring service flow
WO2011134329A1 (en) Method and system for transmitting small data packets
WO2019100882A1 (en) Session processing method, device, and system
WO2011060673A1 (en) Public bearer establishment method, data transmission method and core network side apparatus
WO2009049529A1 (en) Load bearing establishment method and related device
WO2013064104A1 (en) Data transmission method, mobility management entity and mobile terminal
WO2017113130A1 (en) Resource requesting method, device, network side node and system
WO2022012468A1 (en) Routing configuration method and apparatus
WO2019206322A1 (en) Capability opening method, related device and system
WO2021097858A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2020034971A1 (en) Method and apparatus for allocating ebi
WO2015062287A1 (en) Local exchange method and system of terminal
WO2018082070A1 (en) Data packet processing method, control plane network element and user plane network element
WO2022047803A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2021163894A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus based on relay
WO2023024931A1 (en) Inter-device communication method and apparatus
WO2022253004A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2013185288A1 (en) Method, system and device for processing data packet
WO2019136695A1 (en) Data transmission method and device, and computer storage medium
WO2022033543A1 (en) Relay communication method, and communication apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21833093

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21833093

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1